Operating Instructions
METTLER TOLEDO Excellence Precision Balances and Weighing Platformsfor Ex Zone 2
www.mt.com/support
Overview
2
Power Supply Aux 1 Aux 2 RS 23
1mg
12
3
3
3
6
7
8
9
10
13 14
1516
17
4
6
8
11
6
10
12
11
11
10
10
6
11
12
3
3
3
4
12
3
3
3
4
12
3
3
3
4
5
18
187
6
Overview of Excellence precision balances for Ex-zone 2
1 Terminal(fordetailss.Section5) 2 Display(Touch-sensitive“TouchScreen”) 3 Operatingkeys 4 Typename 5 Glassdraftshield 6 Weighingpan 7 Draftshieldelement 8 Levelindicator 9 Fasteningpointforanti-theftdevice 10 Safetyfoots(10mg,0.1g+1gmodels) 11 Levellingscrew 12 RS232Cserialinterface 13 Slotforsecondinterface(optional) 14 SocketforACadapter 15 Aux1(connectionfor“ErgoSens”) 16 Aux2(connectionfor“ErgoSens”) 17 Fasteningforauxiliarydisplaystandorterminalstand(optional) 18 Handleforoperationofthedraft-shielddoor
S + M platforms:
Overview
3
12
1
5
2
6 8
9
13
14 15 16
17
183
3
4
7
11
3
10
11 6
186
6
1 Terminalwithterminalsupport(fordetailss.Section5) 2 Display(Touch-sensitive“TouchScreen”) 3 Operatingkeys 4 Typename 5 Weighingpan 6 Pointsofattachmentforterminalorcover 7 Cover 8 Levelindicator 9 Fasteningpointforanti-theftdevice 10 Coverplateforbelow-thebalanceweighing(hookoptional) 11 Levellingscrew 12 RS232Cserialinterface 13 Slotforsecondinterface(optional) 14 Connectorforterminalcable 15 Aux1(connectionfor“ErgoSens”) 16 Aux2(connectionfor“ErgoSens”) 17 SocketforACadapter 18 Fasteningforterminalstand(optional)
L platform:
Overview
4
Power Supply Aux 1 Aux 2 RS 23
1mg
S + M Platforms:
1
2
3
3
3
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12
1314
8
8
8
5
1
7
7
7
8
8
4
3
1
1
15
15
8
8
4
Overview of Excellence precision weighing platforms for Ex-zone 2
1 Typename 2 Glassdraftshield 3 Weighingpan 4 Draftshieldelement 5 Levelindicator 6 Fasteningpointforanti-theftdevice 7 Safetyfoots(10mg,0.1g+1gmodels) 8 Levellingscrew 9 RS232Cserialinterface 10 Slotforsecondinterface(optional) 11 SocketforACadapter 12 Aux1 13 Aux2 14 Fasteningforauxiliarydisplaystandorterminalstand(optional) 15 Handleforoperationofthedraft-shielddoor
3
Overview
5
1 Typename 2 Weighingpan 3 Pointsofattachmentforterminalorcover 4 Cover 5 Levelindicator 6 Fasteningpointforanti-theftdevice 7 Coverplateforbelow-thebalanceweighing(hookoptional) 8 Levellingscrew 9 RS232Cserialinterface 10 Slotforsecondinterface(optional) 11 Connectorforterminalcable 12 Aux1 13 Aux2 14 SocketforACadapter 15 Fasteningforterminalstand(optional)
12
2
6
8
913
14
3
3
4
711
10
18
5
8
3
3
4 3
3
154
1
L Platform:
Contents
6
Contents1 Getting to know your balance ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................................... 111.2 IntroducingtheXS-Ex2precisionbalancesandX-Ex2weighingplatforms..................................................................... 111.3 Conventionsandsymbolsusedintheseoperatinginstructions.................................................................................... 111.4 Cautionarynotes–Intendeduse................................................................................................................................ 12
2 Setting up the balance .................................................................................................................................. 14
2.1 Unpackingandcheckingthestandardequipment....................................................................................................... 142.1.1 Thefollowingcomponentsarestandardequipment:.................................................................................................... 142.1.2 UnpackingtheDraftshield......................................................................................................................................... 152.2 Settingupthebalance/weighingplatform................................................................................................................... 162.2.1 Installingthedraftshieldandweighingpan................................................................................................................ 162.2.2 PlacingtheterminalontheXS-Ex2balancewithLweighingplatform........................................................................... 172.3 Selectingthelocationandlevelofthebalance/weighingplatform............................................................................... 192.3.1 Selectingthelocation................................................................................................................................................ 192.3.2 Levelingthebalance/weighingplatform.................................................................................................................... 192.4 InstallationoftheACadapterPSX2............................................................................................................................. 202.4.1 InstallationintheExhazadousarea(zone2).............................................................................................................. 202.4.2 InstallationoutsidetheExhazadousarea................................................................................................................... 202.4.3 Connectiontothebalance/weighingplatform............................................................................................................. 212.4.4 Dismantling............................................................................................................................................................... 212.5 MarkingtheBalance/WeighingplatformandtheACAdapter...................................................................................... 22
3 Connection of peripheral devices and system integration ................................................................................ 23
3.1 Usageofdatainterface“RS232”intheExhazardousarea(zone2)............................................................................. 233.1.1 Theperipheraldevice«P»islocatedinsidetheExhazardousarea................................................................................ 233.1.2 Theperipheraldevice«P»(e.g.PCorprinter)islocatedoutsidetheExhazardousarea................................................. 243.2 Usageoftheoptionaldatainterface“Bluetooth”intheExhazardousarea.................................................................... 253.2.1 Theperipheraldevice«P»islocatedinsidetheExhazardousarea................................................................................ 253.2.2 Theperipheraldevice«P»(e.g.printer)islocatedoutsidetheExhazardousarea.......................................................... 253.3 SpecificationsoftheRS232Cinterface........................................................................................................................ 263.4 MT-SICSInterfacecommandsandfunctions................................................................................................................ 27
4 Your first weighing (XS-Ex2 models only) ...................................................................................................... 30
4.1 Switchingthebalanceonandoff................................................................................................................................ 304.2 Performingasimpleweighing..................................................................................................................................... 30
5 Basic principles for using the terminal and the software(XS-Ex2 models only) ................................................. 31
5.1 Anoverviewoftheterminal........................................................................................................................................ 315.2 Thedisplay................................................................................................................................................................ 325.3 Thebalancesoftware................................................................................................................................................. 335.4 Thetypicaloperatingsequence.................................................................................................................................. 355.5 Thesecuritysysteminyourbalance............................................................................................................................ 36
6 System settings (XS-Ex2 models only) .......................................................................................................... 37
6.1 Callingupthesystemsettings.................................................................................................................................... 376.2 Anoverviewofthesystemsettings.............................................................................................................................. 376.3 Settingsforcalibrationandtests................................................................................................................................. 386.3.1 Fullyautomaticadjustmentfunction“FACT”................................................................................................................. 386.3.2 Defineexternaladjustmentweight.............................................................................................................................. 39
Contents
7
6.3.3 Defineexternaltestweight.......................................................................................................................................... 406.3.4 Defineadjustmentandtestprintouts........................................................................................................................... 406.4 Specifybalanceparameters....................................................................................................................................... 416.4.1 Adaptationtothetypeofbalance............................................................................................................................... 426.4.2 Adaptationtotheambientconditions.......................................................................................................................... 426.4.3 Speedofthevaluerelease......................................................................................................................................... 426.4.4 Automaticzerosetting................................................................................................................................................ 426.5 Selectdialoglanguage.............................................................................................................................................. 436.6 Selectperipheraldevices............................................................................................................................................ 436.7 Terminalsettings........................................................................................................................................................ 456.8 Dateandtime............................................................................................................................................................ 466.9 Defineaccessrightsandspecifythepassword............................................................................................................ 476.10 Energysavingfunction(standby)................................................................................................................................ 486.11 Settingsforexternalkeys(Auxconnections)................................................................................................................ 486.12 Loadingthefactorysettings........................................................................................................................................ 496.13 Accessbalanceinformation....................................................................................................................................... 496.14 Printingthesystemsettings........................................................................................................................................ 50
7 The “Weighing” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ......................................................................................... 51
7.1 Selecttheapplication................................................................................................................................................ 517.2 Settingsforthe“Weighing”application........................................................................................................................ 517.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 517.2.2 Selectfunctionkeys................................................................................................................................................... 537.2.3 Selectinformationfields............................................................................................................................................. 547.2.4 Selectionsforautomaticprintouts............................................................................................................................... 547.2.5 Selectweighingunits................................................................................................................................................. 557.2.6 Definefreelyselectableweighingunits....................................................................................................................... 557.2.7 Defineprintout........................................................................................................................................................... 567.2.8 Selectionsformanualprintouts.................................................................................................................................. 587.2.9 Formattingtheoutputdata......................................................................................................................................... 587.2.10 Defineidentifier.......................................................................................................................................................... 617.2.11 Specificationsforhandlingbarcodedata.................................................................................................................... 617.2.12 Specificationsforprocessingkeyboardentries............................................................................................................. 627.3 Workingwiththe“Weighing”application..................................................................................................................... 637.3.1 Changingthereadabilityofthemeasuredweight........................................................................................................ 637.3.2 Workingwiththeitemcounter.................................................................................................................................... 637.3.3 Workingwithidentifiers.............................................................................................................................................. 637.4 Adjustthebalanceandchecktheadjustment............................................................................................................. 657.4.1 FullyautomaticadjustmentFACT................................................................................................................................ 657.4.2 Adjustmentwiththeinternalweight............................................................................................................................ 657.4.3 Adjustmentwithanexternalweight............................................................................................................................. 667.4.4 Checkingtheadjustmentwiththeinternalweight........................................................................................................ 677.4.5 Checkingtheadjustmentwithanexternalweight........................................................................................................ 677.4.6 Adjustmentandtestprint-outs(sampleprintouts)........................................................................................................ 68
8 The “Statistics” application (XS-Ex2 models only) .......................................................................................... 69
8.1 Introductiontothe“Statistics”application.................................................................................................................... 698.2 Selecttheapplication................................................................................................................................................ 698.3 Settingsforthe“Statistics”application........................................................................................................................ 698.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 698.3.2 Specialfunctionkeysforstatisticalpurposes............................................................................................................... 70
Contents
8
8.3.3 Specialstatisticalinformationfields............................................................................................................................ 718.3.4 Specialprintoutinformationforstatisticalpurposes..................................................................................................... 718.3.5 Activateadditivemode............................................................................................................................................... 738.4 Workingwiththe“Statistics”application...................................................................................................................... 738.4.1 Statisticalrecordingofseriesofweighings.................................................................................................................. 738.4.2 Additiveweighingtoatargetvalue.............................................................................................................................. 758.4.3 Sampleprintoutwithstatisticalvalues......................................................................................................................... 768.4.4 Formulasusedforcalculatingstatisticalvalues........................................................................................................... 77
9 The “Formulation” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ...................................................................................... 78
9.1 Introductiontothe“Formulation”application.............................................................................................................. 789.2 Selecttheapplication................................................................................................................................................ 789.3 Settingsforthe“Formulation”application.................................................................................................................... 789.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 789.3.2 Specialfunctionkeysforformulation........................................................................................................................... 799.3.3 Specialinformationfieldsforformulation.................................................................................................................... 809.3.4 Specialprintoutinformationforformulation................................................................................................................. 809.3.5 Specialidentifiersforformulation................................................................................................................................ 829.4 Workingwiththe“Formulation”application................................................................................................................. 829.4.1 Defaultsettings.......................................................................................................................................................... 829.4.2 Operatingsequence................................................................................................................................................... 839.4.3 Sampleprintoutforaformulation............................................................................................................................... 84
10 The “Density” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ............................................................................................. 85
10.1 Introductiontothe“Density”application...................................................................................................................... 8510.2 Selecttheapplication................................................................................................................................................ 8510.3 Settingsforthe“Density”application........................................................................................................................... 8510.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 8510.3.2 Choosingthemethodofdensitydetermination........................................................................................................... 8610.3.3 Selectionoftheauxiliaryliquid................................................................................................................................... 8610.3.4 Activateordeactivatethestatistics.............................................................................................................................. 8710.3.5 Specificationsforcalculatinganddisplayingtheresult................................................................................................ 8710.3.6 Specialfunctionkeysfordensitydetermination........................................................................................................... 8710.3.7 Specialinformationfieldsfordensitydetermination..................................................................................................... 8810.3.8 Specialprintinformationfordensitydetermination...................................................................................................... 8910.4 Workingwiththe“Density”application........................................................................................................................ 9110.4.1 Determiningthedensityofnon-poroussolidbodies..................................................................................................... 9110.4.2 Determiningthedensityofliquidsusingasinker......................................................................................................... 9210.4.3 Determiningthedensityofpasteswiththeaidofagammasphere.............................................................................. 9310.4.4 Sampleprintoutofadensitydetermination................................................................................................................. 9410.5 Usingthedensitystatistics.......................................................................................................................................... 9510.6 Formulaeusedtocalculatedensity............................................................................................................................. 9710.6.1 Formulaefordeterminingthedensityofsolidbodies................................................................................................... 9710.6.2 Formulaefordeterminingthedensityofliquidsandpastes.......................................................................................... 9710.7 Densitytablefordistilledwater................................................................................................................................... 9810.8 Densitytableforethanol............................................................................................................................................. 98
11 The “Percent Weighing” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ............................................................................. 99
11.1 Introductiontothe“PercentWeighing”application...................................................................................................... 9911.2 Selectingtheapplication............................................................................................................................................ 9911.3 Settingsforthe“PercentWeighing”application........................................................................................................... 99
Contents
9
11.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................... 9911.3.2 Specialfunctionkeysforpercentweighing................................................................................................................ 10011.3.3 Specialinformationfieldsforpercentweighing.......................................................................................................... 10011.3.4 AdditionalUnitforpercentweighing.......................................................................................................................... 10111.3.5 SpecialReportInformationforpercentweighing........................................................................................................ 10111.4 Workingwiththe“PercentWeighing”application....................................................................................................... 10211.4.1 Simplepercentweighing.......................................................................................................................................... 10211.4.2 Percentweighingtoatargetvalue............................................................................................................................ 10311.4.3 Exampleofapercentweighingreport....................................................................................................................... 103
12 The “Piece Counting” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ............................................................................... 104
12.1 Introductiontothe“PieceCounting”application........................................................................................................ 10412.2 Selectingtheapplication.......................................................................................................................................... 10412.3 Settingsforthe“PieceCounting”application............................................................................................................. 10412.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 10412.3.2 Specifyingthefixedreferencepiececount................................................................................................................ 10512.3.3 Specialfunctionkeysforpiececounting................................................................................................................... 10512.3.4 Specialinformationfieldsforpiececounting............................................................................................................. 10612.3.5 Additionalunitforpiececounting............................................................................................................................. 10712.3.6 Specialreportinformationforpiececounting............................................................................................................ 10712.4 Workingwiththe“PieceCounting”application.......................................................................................................... 10812.4.1 Simplepiececounting............................................................................................................................................. 10812.4.2 Totalingpiececountsandincludingtheminstatistics................................................................................................ 11012.4.3 Countingtoatargetvalue........................................................................................................................................ 11212.4.4 Exampleofapiececountingreportwithstatisticalvalues.......................................................................................... 113
13 The “Dynamic Weighing” application (XS-Ex2 models only) ......................................................................... 114
13.1 Introductiontothe“DynamicWeighing”application................................................................................................... 11413.2 Selectingtheapplication.......................................................................................................................................... 11413.3 Settingsforthe“DynamicWeighing”Application........................................................................................................ 11413.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 11413.3.2 Specialfunctionkeysfordynamicweighing.............................................................................................................. 11513.3.3 Adaptingtheapplicationtothedynamicbehavioroftheweighingmaterial................................................................ 11613.3.4 Settingsforthestartofweighing............................................................................................................................... 11613.3.5 Settingsforthebeepattheendofthemeasurementcycle........................................................................................ 11713.3.6 Settingsfortheautomatictarefunction..................................................................................................................... 11713.3.7 Specialinformationfieldsfordynamicweighing........................................................................................................ 11813.3.8 Specialreportinformationfordynamicweighing...................................................................................................... 11813.3.9 Automaticormanualreportingofindividualvalues.................................................................................................... 11913.3.10 Selectingthedestinationfortheoutputdata............................................................................................................. 12013.3.11 Formattingtheoutputdata....................................................................................................................................... 12013.3.12 Activateordeactivatestatistics................................................................................................................................. 12213.4 Workingwiththe“DynamicWeighing”application..................................................................................................... 12313.4.1 Dynamicweighingwithautomaticstart..................................................................................................................... 12313.4.2 Dynamicweighingwithmanualstart........................................................................................................................ 12413.4.3 Recordingstatisticsofdynamicweighing.................................................................................................................. 12413.4.4 Exampleofadynamicweighingreport...................................................................................................................... 125
14 The application “LabX Client” (XS-Ex2 models only) ..................................................................................... 126
14.1 Introductiontothe“LabXClient”application.............................................................................................................. 12614.2 Selectingtheapplication.......................................................................................................................................... 126
Contents
10
15 Software updates ........................................................................................................................................ 127
15.1 Operatingprinciple.................................................................................................................................................. 12715.2 Requirements.......................................................................................................................................................... 12715.3 Loadingsoftwareupdatesfromtheinternet............................................................................................................... 12715.4 Loadingthenewsoftwareintothebalance/weighingplatform................................................................................... 12815.5 Savingandreloadingbalancesettings...................................................................................................................... 130
16 Error and status messages .......................................................................................................................... 131
16.1 Errormessagesoccurringduringnormaloperation................................................................................................... 13116.2 Furthererrormessages............................................................................................................................................ 13116.3 Statusmessages...................................................................................................................................................... 132
17 Cleaning and service .................................................................................................................................. 133
17.1 Cleaningthedraftshield.......................................................................................................................................... 134
18 Technical data and accessories ................................................................................................................... 135
18.1 Generaldata............................................................................................................................................................ 13518.2 Model-specificdataoftheExcellenceXS-Ex2precisionbalances............................................................................... 13618.2.1 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof0.1mg/1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield........................................... 13618.2.2 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof10mg/0.1g,Splatform...................................................................... 13718.2.3 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof10mg/0.1g,Mplatform..................................................................... 13818.2.4 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof0.1g/1g,Lplatform........................................................................... 13918.3 Model-specificdataoftheExcellenceX-Ex2precisionweighingplatforms.................................................................. 14018.3.1 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformwithreadabilityof0.1mg/1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield................................ 14018.3.2 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformwithreadabilityof10mg/0.1g,Splatform.......................................................... 14118.3.3 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformwithreadabilityof0.1g,Mplatform...................................................................... 14218.3.4 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformwithreadabilityof0.1g,Lplatform........................................................................ 14318.4 DimensionsoftheExcellenceXS-Ex2precisionbalances........................................................................................... 14418.4.1 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof0.1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield....................................................... 14418.4.2 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield.......................................................... 14518.4.3 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof10mg,Splatformwithdraftshieldelement............................................ 14618.4.4 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof0.1g,Splatform................................................................................... 14718.4.5 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof10mg/0.1g,Mplatform..................................................................... 14818.4.6 XS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithreadabilityof0.1g/1g,Lplatform........................................................................... 14918.5 DimensionsoftheExcellenceX-Ex2precisionweighingplatforms.............................................................................. 15018.5.1 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof0.1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield.......................................... 15018.5.2 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof1mg,Splatformwithdraftshield............................................. 15118.5.3 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof10mg,Splatformwithdraftshieldelement.............................. 15218.5.4 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof0.1g,Splatform..................................................................... 15318.5.5 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof0.1g,Mplatform..................................................................... 15418.5.6 X-Ex2precisionweighingplatformswithreadabilityof0.1g,Lplatform...................................................................... 15518.6 Accessories............................................................................................................................................................. 156
19 Appendix ................................................................................................................................................... 158
19.1 Conversiontableforweightunits.............................................................................................................................. 15819.2 SOPs-standardoperatingprocedures...................................................................................................................... 15919.3 Certificateoftheissuinginstitution........................................................................................................................... 16119.3.1 PowersupplyPSX2................................................................................................................................................... 16119.3.2 BalancesXS-Ex2andPlatformsX-Ex2........................................................................................................................ 164
20 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 167
Gettingtoknowyourbalance–Cautionarynotes–Intendeduse
11
1 Getting to know your balanceInthisSectionyouwillbegivenbasicinformationaboutyourbalance.PleasereadrightthroughthisSectioncarefullyevenifyoualreadyhaveexperiencewithMETTLERTOLEDObalances;please pay special attention to the safety warnings!
1.1 IntroductionThankyouforchoosingaMETTLERTOLEDObalance.
ExcellenceprecisionbalancesandplatformsforuseinZone2hazardousareascombineahostofweighingandsettingpossibilitieswithuncommonoperatingcomfort.WiththesebalancessoftwareupdatescanbedownloadedfromtheInternetandloadedintothebalance.TheseoperatinginstructionsapplytoallbalancesandweighingplatformsoftheXS/X-Ex2lineofprecisionbalances.However,thedifferentmodelshavedifferentcharacteristicsregardingequipmentandperformance.Specialnotesinthetextindicatewherethismakesadifferencetooperation.
1.2 Introducing the XS-Ex2 precision balances and X-Ex2 weighing platformsTheX/XS-Ex2familyofprecisionbalancescomprisesarangeofprecisionbalanceswhichdifferfromeachotherinrelationtotheirweighingrangeandresolution.ThefollowingfeaturesarecommontoallmodelsoftheX/XS-Ex2lines:
– Typeofprotection:EExnLforuseinZone2hazardousareas
– Fullyautomaticadjustment“FACT”usinginternalweight.
– IntegralRS232Cinterface.
– Built-inapplicationsfornormalweighing,statistics,formulation,piececounting,percentweighing,density, dynamicweighingandLabXClient.(XS-Ex2modelsonly)
– Touch-sensitivegraphicsterminal(“TouchScreen”)(XS-Ex2modelsonly)
Abriefwordaboutstandards,guidelines,andmethodsofqualityassurance:TheXS/X-Ex2precisionbalancesandplatformsconformtocurrentstandardsandguidelines.Theysupportstandardprocedures,specifications,workingmethods,andreportsaccordingtoGLP(GoodLaboratoryPractice),andallowthecreationofSOPs(StandardOperatingProcedure).Inthisconnection,recordsofworkingpro-ceduresandadjustmentsbecomeveryimportant;forthispurposewerecommendyoutouseaprinterfromtheMETTLERTOLEDOrange,sincetheseareoptimallyadaptedtoyourbalance.TheXS/X-Ex2precisionbalancesandplatformsconformtoallapplicablenormsandguidelinesandhaveanEUdeclarationofconformity.METTLERTOLEDOiscertifiedinaccordancewithISO9001andISO14001.
1.3 Conventions and symbols used in these operating instructionsThefollowingconventionsapplythroughouttheseoperatinginstructions:
– Keydesignationsareindicatedbydoubleangularparentheses(e.g.«On/Off»or«E»).
Thesesymbolsindicatesafetynotesandhazardwarningswhich,ifignored,cancausepersonaldangertotheuser,damagetothebalanceorotherequipment,ormalfunction-ingofthebalance.
Thissymbolindicatesadditionalinformationandnotes.Thesemakeworkingwithyourbalanceeasier,aswellasensuringthatyouuseitcorrectlyandeconomically.
Gettingtoknowyourbalance–Cautionarynotes–Intendeduse
12
Cautionary notes regarding installation and operation in the Ex hazardous area, zone 2:
– Theinstallationmaybeperformedonlybyaqualifiedelectricianasdescribedinthisinstallationinforma-tion.
– Checkwhetherspecialclothingorspecialtoolsareneededforworkinthehazardousareaoftheend-userandthenwearorusetheseifrequired.
– Findoutwhethertheuseofcertainelectronicdevices(cellphones,computers,etc.) isprohibitedinthehazardousareaoftheend-user,andthenfollowtheseregulations.
– Establishingandseparatingtheconnectionstothepowersupplyareexclusivelythetaskoftheelectrician(s)oftheenduser.
– Anymodificationstothebalance/weighingplatformandACadapter,aswellasrepairstotheassemblies,areprohibited.Theseactionsendangerthesafetyofthesystem,resultinlossoftheExApproval,andnullifyanywarrantyandproductliabilityclaims.
– ServiceworkandrepairsmaybeperformedonlybypersonnelauthorizedbyMETTLERTOLEDO.
– Theclassificationaszone2mustbeconfirmedbytheregulatorybodyofyourprofession.
– CheckthatthebalanceandACadapterareinperfectconditionbeforeputtingintooperationforthefirsttimeandatleastevery3years.
1.4 Cautionary notes – Intended useAlwaysoperateanduseyourbalanceonlyinaccordancewiththeinstructionscontainedinthismanual.Pleasefollowtheinstructionsforcommissioningyournewbalance/weighingplatformcarefully.
If the instrument is not installed and used in accordance with these operating instructions, the protection provided the instrument and the safety will be impaired.
– Foruseonlyinclosedandcleaninteriorrooms
– Donotusesharplypointedobjectstooperatethekeyboardofyourbalance!
– Althoughyourbalance/weighingplatformisveryruggedlyconstructed,itisneverthlessaprecisioninstrument.Treatitwithcorrespondingcare.
– Donotopenthebalance/weighingplatformorpowersupplyunit.Theydonotcontainanypartsthatcanbemaintained,repairedorreplacedbytheuser.Ifyoueverhaveproblemswithyourbalance,contactyourMETTLERTOLEDOdealer.
– UseonlybalanceaccessoriesandperipheraldevicefromMETTLERTOLEDO;theyareoptimallyadaptedtoyourbalance.
– UseonlytheACadapterPSX2deliverdwithyourbalance/weighingplatform,andcheckthatthevoltageprintedonitsthesameasyourlocalpowersupplyvoltage.
Approved for use in Zone 2 hazardous areas.ThePSX2ACadaptersuppliesthepowertotheXS-Ex2precisionbalancesandX-Ex2precisionweighingplatformsfortheirintendeduseintheExhazardousareaclassifiedasZone2.Inthiszone,ignitableconcentrationsofflammablegases,vaporsorliquidsarenotlikelytooccurinnormaloperation,andiftheydooccur,willexistforonlyashortperiod.TheACadaptercanbeinstalledinsideoroutsidetheExhazardousarea.
Use in zone 1 and 0 is not permitted.
Gettingtoknowyourbalance–Cautionarynotes–Intendeduse
13
– It is important toobserve theEuropeanDirectiveonEquipment IntendedforUse inPotentiallyExplosiveAtmospheres(94/9/EU)!
– Onlyaccessorieswhichareexplicitymentionedinthisdocumentmaybeused,andtheymustbeinstalledandoperatedasdescribedhere.
– Installationworkonthebalance/weighingplatformmustbecarriedoutoutsidethehazardousarea.
Safety measures during operation in the Ex hazardous area, zone 2:
– ACadapterandbalancemaybeoperatedonlywhenthehousingisclosed.
– The instrument and its protective cover must be damp-cleaned-replacetheprotectivecoveronlyoutsidethehazardousarea.
Hinweise:• AccordingtoDirective94/9/EU(ATEX95),XS-Ex2precisionbalances,X-Ex2precisionweighingplatforms,and
thePSX2ACadapterareGroupII,Category3Gdevicesthat,accordingtoDirective99/92/EU(ATEX137),canbeusedinZone2,aswellasinGasGroupsIIA,IIBandIIC,whicharepotentiallyignitablebycombustiblesubstancesintherangeofTemperatureClassesT1toT5.
• Foruse/installation,therequirementsofEN60079-14mustbeobserved.
Special Conditions X for the AC adapter PSX21. Thepowersupplycableof theMETTLERTOLEDOTypePSX2ACadaptermustbe installedwithprotection
againstmechanicaldamage.2. Onlythespecialplug-connectoroftheoutputcircuitmaybepluggedinto,orunpluggedfrom,apower-con-
sumingdevicesuchasabalancewhileitisundervoltage.3. Theinternalinductance(includingtheconnectingcable)ofanypower-consumingdeviceconnectedtothe
ACadaptermustnotexceed<10µH,anditsinternalcapacitymustnotexceed<213nF.Special Condition X for the balance / weighing platform 1. XS-Ex2precisionbalancesandX-Ex2precisionweighingplatformscanonlybeusedinclosedandclean
interiorspaces.2. Theinstrumentanditsprotectivecovermaybecleanedonlywithadamp cloth.3.Theprotectivecovermaybereplacedonlyoutsidethehazardousarea.
Technical data of the precision balances in the XS/X-Ex2 line and the AC adapter PSX2 see Section 18
Disposal
InconformancewiththeEuropeanDirective2002/96/EConWasteElectricalandElectronicEquipment(WEEE)thisdevicemaynotbedisposedofindomesticwaste.ThisalsoappliestocountriesoutsidetheEU,pertheirspecificrequirements.
Pleasedisposeofthisproductinaccordancewithlocalregulationsatthecollectingpointspecifiedforelectricalandelectronicequipment.
Ifyouhaveanyquestions,pleasecontacttheresponsibleauthorityorthedistributorfromwhichyoupurchasedthisdevice.
Shouldthisdevicebepassedontootherparties(forprivateorprofessionaluse),thecontentofthisregulationmustalsoberelated.
Thankyouforyourcontributiontoenvironmentalprotection.
Settingupthebalance
14
2 Setting up the balanceInthissectionyouwilllearnhowtounpackyournewbalance/weighingplatform,setitupandprepareitforoperation.Oncompletionofthestepsdescribedinthissection,yourbalance/weighingplatformisreadyforoperation.
2.1 Unpacking and checking the standard equipmentOpenthepackagingandcarefullyremoveallcomponents.
2.1.1 The following components are standard equipment:
All types– XS-Ex2balanceorX-Ex2weighingplatform– ACadapterPSX2– Operatinginstructions,productioncertificateandCEdeclarationofconformity
Excellence precision balance / -weighing platform with readability of 0.1 mg– Protectivecoverforterminal(XSmodelsonly)– Draftshield“Pro”withbottomplateandringseal– Draftshieldelement– Weighingpanø90mm
Excellence precision balance / -weighing platform with readability of 1 mg– Protectivecoverforterminal(XSmodelsonly)– Draftshield“Pro”withBottomplate– Weighingpansupport– Weighingpan127x127mm
Excellence precision balance / -weighing platform with readability of 10 mg (S+M-Plattform)– Protectivecover– Weighingpansupport– Weighingpan
Splatform:170x205mmMplatform:237x237mm
– Draftshieldelement(Splatformonly)
Excellence precision balance / -weighing platform with readability of 0.1 g (S+M-Plattform) und 1 g (M-Plattform)– Protectivecover– Weighingpansupport– Weighingpan
Splatform:190x223mmMplatform:237x237mm
Excellence precision balance / -weighing platform with readability of 0.1 g und 1 g (L-Plattform)– Weighingpan280x360mm– Protectivecoverforterminal(XSmodelsonly)
Note:
– Thebalance/weighingplatformmustbedisconnectedfromthepowersupplybeforeanyset-uporinstallationwork.
– All unpacking, set-up, installation or disassembly work must be performed outside the hazardous area.
Settingupthebalance
15
D C
EC D
A
B
– Placethedraftshieldonacleansurface.
– Placethedraftshieldonacleansurface.
– Liftthecarton(B)offoverthehandleandthepullthecartonofftowardtheback.
– Closethecover(A)again.
– Pushalltheglasspanelsasfarastheywillgototheback.
Note: Checkbyrunningafingerallthewayroundthatthesealring(C)isfittedtightlyintotheopeninginthedraftshieldbase(D),seeillustrationbelow.
Note: Holdtheglasspanelsfirmlysotheydo notgetpulledoffandfalltothefloor!
– Insertthebottomplate(E).
1 mg models:– Insertthebottomplate(E).
– Placetheringseal(C)intothedraftshieldbase(D)fromabove.
• Pushthecompleteringseal(C)throughtheopeninginthedraftshieldbaseandthenpullthetopedgeupwardthroughtheopeninguntniltheedgeliesflatandtightallthewayround.
2.1.2 Unpacking the Draft shield
0.1 mg models:
Settingupthebalance
16
2
4
3
1
2
4
3
1
2.2 Setting up the balance/weighing platformThesizeoftheweighingpandependsonthereadabilityandmaximumcapacityofthebalance.
2.2.1 Installing the draft shield and weighing pan
Excellence precision balances/weighing platforms with readability of 0.1 mg, with draft shield
Placethefollowingcomponentsonthebalanceinthespecifiedorder:
Excellence precision balances/weighing platforms with readability of 1 mg, with draft shield
Placethefollowingcomponentsonthebalanceinthespecifiedorder:
Note: Pushthesideglassbackasfarasitwillgoandgraspthedraftshieldwithbothhandsonthebarsatthetop..
– Draftshield(1)withringsealinserted(Section2.1.2).
– Bottomplate(2),ifnotalreadyinserted(Section2.1.2)!
– Draftshieldelement(3)
– Weighingpan(4)
Note: Cleaningthedraftshield,seeSection15
Note: Pushthesideglassbackasfarasitwillgoandgraspthedraftshieldwithbothhandsonthebarsatthetop..
– Draftshield(1)
– Bottomplate(2),ifnotalreadyinserted(Section2.1.2)!
– Pansupport(3)
– Weighingpan(4)
Note: Cleaningthedraftshield,seeSection15
Excellence precision balances/weighing platforms with readability of 10 mg
Settingupthebalance
17
1
2
3
1
2
2.2.2 Placing the terminal on the XS-Ex2 balance with L weighing platform
B
A
Theterminalcanbeattachedtothelongorshortsideofthebalance.
– Mounttheweighingpan.
– Carefullyturntheweighingplatformoverontotheweighingpan..
Attaching the terminal to the long side:
– Dismantlethecover(B)byremovingthe2screws(A).
Excellence precision balances/weighing platforms with readability of 10 mg (M platform), 0.1 g (S / M platform) and 1 g (M platform)
Placethefollowingcomponentsonthebalanceinthespecifiedorder:
– Pansupport(1)
– Weighingpan(2)
(S platform)
Placethefollowingcomponentsonthebalanceinthespecifiedorder:
– Pansupport(1)
– Weighingpan(2)
– Draftshieldelement(3). –>
Note: Itisalsopossibletoworkwithoutthedraftshieldelement(3).How-ever,dependingontheambientconditions,theresultmaybeslightlylessstable.
Settingupthebalance
18
– Attachtheterminaltotheterminalsupport(C)asshown,usingthescrews(A)fromthecoverthatwasremoved.
– Inserttheterminalcable(D)intothecablechannel,asshown.
– Screwtheconnectoroftheterminalcableintothesocket(E).
– Turnthebalancebackoverintoposition.
Attaching the terminal to the short side:
– Dismantlethecover(G)byremovingthe2screws(F).
– Attachtheterminalwithterminalsupporttothepointsofattachment(H)withthescrews(F).
– Inserttheterminalcable(D)intothecablechannel,asshown.
– Screwtheconnectoroftheterminalcableintothesocket(E).
– Turnthebalancebackoverintoposition.
A D
C
E
F
G
H D E
Settingupthebalance
19
A
B B
A
2.3 Selecting the location and level of the balance/weighing platformYourbalance/weighingplatformisaprecisioninstrumentandwillthankyouforanoptimumlocationwithhighaccuracyanddepend-ability
2.3.1 Selecting the location
Selectastable,vibration-freepositionthatisashorizontalaspossible.Thesurfacemustbeabletosafelycarrytheweightofafullyloadedbalance/weighingplatform.
Observeambientconditions(seeSection.18.1)
Avoidthefollowing:– Directsunlight– Powerfuldrafts(e.g.fromfansorairconditioners)– Excessivetemperaturefluctuations
2.3.2 Leveling the balance / weighing platform
Alignthebalance/weighingplatformhorizontallybyturningthelevelingscrewsoftheweigh-ingplatformhousinguntiltheairbubbleisintheinnercircleofthelevelindicator.
Example: Thepositionoftheairbubbleillustrateswhichlevelingscrewyouneedtoturnandinwhichdirectionsothattheairbubblemovestothecenter.Inthisexample,turntheleftlevelingscrewcounterclockwise.L=leftlevelingscrew,R=rightlevelingscrew
Balance / Weighing platform with readability of 10 mg, 0.1 g and 1 g (S + M platforms)
– Removetheclamps(A)forthesafetyfeetbyturningthemoutwards.
screws(B)untiltheairbubbleisintheinnercircleofthelevelindicator.
– Securethesafetyfeetbyturningtheclamps(A)inwardsasfarastheywillgo.
Note:Turntheclamps(A)outwardsasfarastheywillgo
(~90°),sothatthesafetyfeetcanmovefreely.
– Nowlevelthebalance/weighingplatformbyturningbothleveling
Settingupthebalance
20
2.4 Installation of the AC adapter PSX2
Zone 2
Country-specific 115/230V power supply connection
If theACadapter is installed inzone2, thepowersupplycablemusteitherbeconnectedtothescrewterminalsoaconnectionboxoutsidethehazadousarea,ortoaconnectionboxofsuitableprotectiontypewithinthehazardousareaofthebuilding.RequirementAnall-polesupplyisolationdevicemustbeconnectedonthelinesideofthescrewterminalsofthebuildinginstallation.Procedure• InstallACadapterinapermanentpositionsothatitisprotected
againstmechanicaldamage.• Attachpowercabletothescrewterminalsofthebuildinginstal-
lationasfollows: Coreendyellow/geen =ground Coreendblack =phase Coreendblue =neutralconductor• Routepowercablesothatitisprotectedagainstmechanical
damage.
2.4.2 Installation outside the Ex hazadous area
Zone 2 Outside hazardous area
Country-specific 115/230V power supply connection
IftheACadapterisinstalledoutsidethehazardousareaundonlythebalance/platformisinthehazardousarea,theACadaptercanalsobeconnectedtothebuildinginstallationusingacommercialplugconnection.In such a case the power plug is used as a supply isolationdevice.NoteThepowerplugisnotincludedinthestandardequipment.Procedure• InstallACadapterinapermanentpositionsothatitisprotected
againstmechanicaldamage• Connect3-pinpowerplugtopowercable: Coreendyellow/geen =ground Coreendblack =phase Coreendblue =neutralconductor• Plugpowerplugintoreceptacleoutletofthebuildinginstalla-
tion.• Routepowercablesothatitisprotectedagainstmechanical
damage.
– Yourbalance/weighingplatformhasbeendeliveredwithacountry-specificACadapter.CheckwhetherthelocalpowersupplyvoltageiscompatiblewiththeACadapter.If this is not the case, on no account connect the AC adapter to the power supply butcontactyourresponsibleMETTLERTOLEDOdealer.
– The installation may be performed only by a qualified electrician.
2.4.1 Installation in the Ex hazadous area (zone 2)
Settingupthebalance
21
S + M platform L platform
2.4.3 Connection to the balance/weighing platform
Connect the AC adapter to the connectorsocketonthebackside/undersideofyourbal-ance/weighing platform (see figure). Securetheconnectiontothebalancebyscrewingtheplugtightly.
Important: Install the cable in such a way that it will not be damaged and will not hinder day-to-day work.
Onceconnectedtothepowersupply,thebalance/weighingplatformperformsaself-testandisthenreadyforoperation.
2.4.4 DismantlingDisconnect AC adapter from power supply:
• NetzkabelfolgendermassenvondenSchraubkemmenderHausinstallationlösen: Coreendblue=neutralconductor Coreendblack=phase Coreendyellow/green=ground• Unscrewthepowersupplyunit• Removethebalanceandpowersupplycable
Settingupthebalance
22
2.5 Marking the Balance / Weighing platform and the AC Adapter
Procedure:
Checktomakesuremodel plate with the Ex symbol(1)andthe“Electrostatic” warning label (2)hasbeenappliedtothebalance/weighingplatform.
1 2
Instrumentsforuseinhazardousareasmustbemarkedwiththeirtypeofprotectionandwithwarnings.Theappropriatestickersareaffixedtothebalance.
xxxxxxxx
1 2
1
xxxxxxxx
Checktomakesurethatthemodel plate with the Ex symbol(1)hasbeenappliedtotheACadapter.
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
23
3 Connection of peripheral devices and system integrationManyofthebalancesincurrentuse,andespeciallyweighingplatforms,arenormallyintegratedintocomplexcomputerorweighingsystems.TheintegratedRS232oranoptionaldatainterfacecanbeusedtocaptureweighingresultsandtocontroloradjusttheweigh-ingplatform.Standardcommandsareavailableforthispurpose.
RS232
3.1 Usage of data interface “RS232” in the Ex hazardous area (zone 2)
Fig 1:«B»= Standardenergylimiterinhousingwithprotectiontype(EExnA[L]IICT5).
(If«P»≠EEx nL)
P
B
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
The installation must be performed by a professional in accordance with the applicable regulations.IfperipheraldevicesareconnectedtotheRS232datainterfaceofthebalanceintheExhazardousarea,therearetwopossiblecases:
3.1.1 The peripheral device «P» is located inside the Ex hazardous areaTheperipheraldevice«P»whichisusedmustbeapprovedforzone2.
a)Theperipheraldevice«P»does not conform to protection type EEx nL:Tointerrupttheflowofenergythroughthedatacablebetweenthebalanceandtheperipheraldevice«P»anenergylimiter«B» (Figure 1)oranadapter«T»or«O»(Figure 2)withgalvanicisolation.ThisadaptermustbeapprovedforExZone2.
b)Theperipheraldevice«P»does conform to protection type EEx nL:Thedatacabledoesnotneedaspecialenergylimiter(Figure 3).
P≠EEx nL
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
24
3.1.2 The peripheral device «P» (e.g. PC or printer) is located outside the Ex hazardous area
Theperipheral device «P»doesnotneedspecial approval with regard to Ex Zone 2.
To interrupt the flowof energy through thedatacablebetween thebalanceand theperipheral device «P»anenergy limiter «B»(Figure 4)oranadapter«T»or«O»(Figure 5 and 6)withgalvanicisolation.Ifthisadapterisinstalledinthehazardousarea,itmustbeapprovedforExZone2.
Fig. 4:«B»= Standardenergylimiterinhousingwithprotectiontype(EExnA[L]IICT5).
Fig 5:«O» = Opto-electricconverterwithgalvanicisolationwith9-pinRSconnectorfordatatransmissionwithouthardwarehandshake,partnumber224265.
outsideEx hazardous area
outsideEx hazardous area
P
B
P
O
Fig 2:«O» = Opto-electricconverterwithgalvanicisolationwith9-pinRSconnectorfordatatransmissionwithouthardwarehandshake,partnumber224265.
(If«P»≠EEx nL)
O
P
Fig 3: If theperipheraldevice«P»conformstoprotectiontypeEEx nL,nospecialenergylimiterisnecessary
RS=standardRScable,useforcircuit[EExnL]IIC
P≠EEx nL
P=EEx nL
RS
P
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
25
3.2 Usage of the optional data interface “Bluetooth” in the Ex hazardous area
IfperipheraldevicesareconnectedtotheBluetoothdatainterfaceofthebalanceintheExhazardousarea,therearetwopossiblecases:
3.2.2 The peripheral device «P» (e.g. printer) is located outside the Ex hazardous areaTheperipheral device«P»doesnotneedspecialapprovalforuseinZone2.
outsideEx hazardous area
The peripheral device «P» must be approved for use in Zone 2.
3.2.1 The peripheral device «P» is located inside the Ex hazardous area
P
P
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Ex hazardous area, zone 2
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
26
3.3 Specifications of the RS232C interface
Interfacetype: VoltageinterfaceaccordingtoEIARS-232C/DIN66020(CCITTV24/V.28)
Max.cablelength: 15m
Signallevel: Outputs: Inputs:
+5V...+15V(RL=3–7kΩ) +3V...25V
–5V...–15V(RL=3–7kΩ) –3V...25V
Connector: Sub-D,9-pole,female
Operatingmode: Fullduplex
Transmissionmode: Bit-serial,asynchronous
Transmissioncode: ASCII
Baudrates: 600,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,384001)(softwareselectable)
Bits/parity: 7-bit/even,7-bit/odd,7-bit/none,8-bit/none(softwareselectable)
Stopbits: 1stopbit
Handshake: None,XON/XOFF,RTS/CTS(überSoftwarewählbar)
End-of-line: <CR><LF>,<CR>,<LF>softwareselectable)
6
15
9
DataGND
Handshake
Pin2:Balancetransmitline(TxD)
Pin3:Balancereceiveline(RxD))
Pin5:Groundsignal(GND)
Pin7:Cleartosend(hardwarehandshake)(CTS)
Pin8:Requesttosend(hardwarehandshake)(RTS)
1) 38400baudisonlypossibleinspecialcases,suchas:
•Weighingplatformwithoutterminal,or
•Weighingplatformwithterminal,onlyviatheoptionalRS232Cinterface.
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
27
3.4 MT-SICS Interface commands and functionsToenableyoutointegratebalancesandweighingplatformsinyoursysteminasimplemannerandutilizetheircapabilitiestothefull,thebalance/weighingplatformfunctionsareavailableasappropriatecommandsviathedatainterface.
AllMETTLERTOLEDObalancesandweighingplatformslaunchedsupportthestandardizedcommandset“METTLERTOLEDOStandardInterfaceCommandSet”(MT-SICS).Thecommandsavailabledependonthefunctionalityofthebalancesandweighingplatforms.
Basic information on data interchange with the balance/weighing platform
Thebalance/weighingplatformreceivescommandsfromthesystemandacknowledgesthecommandwithanappropriateresponse.
Command formats
Commandssenttothebalance/weighingplatformcompriseoneormorecharactersoftheASCIIcharacterset.Here,thefollowingmustbenoted:
• Entercommandsonlyinuppercase.
• Thepossibleparametersofthecommandmustbeseparatedfromoneanotherandfromthecommandnamebyaspace(ASCII32dec.,inthisdescriptionrepresentedas"/").
• Thepossibleinputfor“text”isasequenceofcharactersofthe8-bitASCIIcharactersetfrom32decto255dec.
• EachcommandmustbeclosedbyCRLF(ASCII13dec.,10dec.).
ThecharactersCRLF,whichcanbeinputtedusingtheEnterorReturnkeyofmostentrykeypads,arenotlistedinthisdescription,butitisessentialtheybeincludedforcommunicationwiththebalance/weighingplatform.
Example
S – Send stable weight value
Command S Sendthecurrentstablenetweightvalue
Response S/S/WeightValue/Unit
Currentstableweightvalueinunitactuallysetunderunit1.
S/I Commandnotexecutable(balance/weighingplatformiscurrentlyexecutinganothercommand,e.g.taring,ortimeoutasstabilitywasnotreached).
S/+ Balanceinoverloadrange.
S/- Balanceinunderloadrange.
Example
Command S Sendastableweightvalue.
Response S/S/////100.00/gThecurrent,stableweightvalueis100.00g
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
28
COM – Settingof the fix RS232-interface
Command COM/Port/Baud/Bit/HS
SettingofthefixRS232-interface(withoutoption)
Port: Interface Port =0(fix)fixRS232 Baud: Baudrate Baud =4 2400 Baud Baud =5 4800 Baud Baud =6 9600 Baud(factorysetting) Baud =7 19200 Baud Baud= 8 38400 Baud Bit: Bit, parity, stop bit Bit =3(fix)8bit,noparity,1stopbit HS: Handshake HS =1(fix)SoftwareHS(Xon/Xoff)Responses COM/A
COM/L
Example COM/0/7/3/1 –> COM/A
C0 – Inquiry/setting of calibration setting
Command C0 Inquiry of calibration setting.
Response C0/A/x1/x2/""
Command C0/x1/x2 Set calibration setting.
x1 Calibtationmode x1=0 Mode=Manual x1=1 Mode=Auto x2 Calibrationweight x2=0Useinternalweight(factorysetting) x2=1 Useexternalweight Responses C0/A Calibrationsettingset.
C0/L Calibrationsettingcannotbeset,e.g.parameterwrongorcertifiedversionoftheweighingplat-form.
C0/I Commanenotexecutableasthebalance/weighingplatformis,e.g.beingtared.
Example
Command C0/0/1 Setcalibrationsettingto“Manual”andexternalweight.
Response C0/A Calibrationsettingset.
Comment
Settingx1=1andx2=0correspondstothemenusetting“FACT”under“Calibration”.
Connectionofperipheraldevicesandsystemintegration
29
Commands MT-SICS level 0I0 InquiryofallimplementedMT-SICScommandsI1 InquiryofMT-SICSlevelandMT-SICSversionsI2 InquiryofbalancedataI3 InquiryofbalanceSWversionandtypedefinitionnumberI4 InquiryofserialnumberI5 SW-IdentificationnumberS SendstableweightvalueSI SendweightvalueimmediatelySIR SendweightvalueimmediatelyandrepeatZ ZeroZI Zeroimmediately@ ResetCommands MT-SICS level 1SR Sendweightvalueonweightchange(SendandRepeat)T TareTA Inquiry/settingoftareweightvalueTAC CleartarevalueCommands MT-SICS level 2C0 Inquiry/settingofcalibrationsettingC1 InitiatecalibrationaccordingtocurrentsettingC2 InitiatecalibrationwithexternalweightC3 InitiatecalibrationwithinternalweightCOM Inquiry/Settingthecommunicationparametersoftheserial
interface
DAT DateI10 BalanceID–InquiryofbalanceidentificationI11 BalancetypeI14 InquiryofbalanceinfoM01 Inquiry/settingofweighingmodeM02 Inquiry/settingofenvironmentM03 Inquiry/settingofAutoZeroM17 Inquiry/settingofProFACTtimecriteriaM18 Inquiry/settingofProFACT/FACTtemperaturecriterion(∆ temp.)M19 Inquiry/settingofadjustmentweightM20 Inquiry/settingoftestweightM21 Inquiry/settingofunitM27 InquiryofadjustmenthistoryM28 InquiryoftemperatureprobeM29 Inquiry/settingofvaluereleaseSIS InquiryofcurrentnetweightvaluesSNR SendstableweightvalueandrepeataftereachdeflectionTIM TimeTST0 Inquiry/settingofthetestfunctionTST1 InitiatetestfunctioninthecurrentsettingTST2 InitiatetestfunctionwithexternalweightTST3 InitiatetestfunctionwithinternalweightUPD Inquiry/settingoftheupdaterateofthehostinterface
Selection of available MT-SICS commands for XS models:Foradditionalcommandsandfurther informationpleaserefertotheReferenceManual“MT-SICSforExcellenceseries11780711”downloadablefromtheInternetunderwww.mt.com/xs-precision.
S – Send stable weight valueCommand S Sendthecurrentstablenetweightvalue.
SI – Send value immediatelyCommand SI Sendthecurrentnetweightvalue,irrespectiveofbalancestability.
SIR – Send weight value immediately and repeatCommand SIR Sendthenetweightvaluesrepeatedly,irrespectiveofbalancestability.
Z – Zero settingCommand Z Zerothebalance.
@ – ResetCommand @ Resetsthebalancetotheconditionfoundafterswitchingon,but
withoutazerosettingbeingperformed.
SR – Send weight value when load changes (Send and Repeat)Command SR Sendthecurrentstableweightvalueandthensendcontinuouslythestableweightvalueafter
everyweightchange.Theweightchangemustbeatleast12.5%ofthelaststableweightvalue,minimum=30d.
ST – Send stable weight after pressing «F» keyCommand ST/1 Sendthecurrentstablenetweightvalueeachtimewhen«F»ispressed.
SU – Send stable weight value with currently displayed unitCommand SU Asthe“S”command,butwiththecurrentlydisplayedunit.
MT-SICS commands available for X weighing platforms:ForfurtherinformationpleaserefertotheReferenceManual“MT-SICSforExcellenceseries11780711”downloadablefromtheInternetunderwww.mt.com/x-platform.
Yourfirstweighing
30
OnOff
OnOff
G
H
4 Your first weighing (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
InthisSectionyouwillgettoknowthosecontrolsanddisplayelementsofyourbalancethatareneededtocarryoutsimpleweighingprocesses.ThisSectionprovidesanintroductiontooperatingyourbalance.
4.1 Switching the balance on and offSwitch balance on:Brieflypressthe«On/Off»key.Thebalancecarriesoutashorttestassoonasithasbeenswitchedon,afterwhichitisreadytoweigh.
Thedisplayshownhereappearsthefirst time the balance is switched on.
Switch balance off:Pressthe«On/Off»keyandholditpresseduntil“OFF”appearsonthedisplay.Thedisplaythengoesblank,andthebalanceisswitchedoff.
4.2 Performing a simple weighingTocarryoutasimpleweighingyouonlyneedthekeysonthelowerpartoftheterminal.Yourbalancehasseparatekeysforzeroadjust-ment(«G»)andfortaring(«H»).
Zero adjustment:The«G»keysetsanewzero,andallweights(includingthetare)aremeasuredwithreferencetothiszero.Afteradjustingthezeroboththetareweightandthenet(gross)weightareequalto0.Usethezerosettingkey«G»wheneveryouwanttobeginanewweighingprocess,andfirstwishtomeasurethetareweightprecisely.
Taring:Ifyouareworkingwithaweighingcontainer,placeitontheweighingpan.Closetheglassdraftshield(ifpresent),thenpressthe«H»keytotarethescale.Thetaringprocesssetstheweightthathasbeenplacedonthescalessincethelastzeroadjustmentasthenewtareweight.Theprevioustare(iftherewasone)isoverwritten.Aftertaring,“Net”appearsonthedisplay,indicatingthatallthedisplayedweightsarenetvalues.Note:If,afterthe«H»keyhasbeenpressed,aninstructiontopressthe«G»keyappears,youhaveattemptedtosetanegativetarevalue.Thisisnotpermitted.Adjustthebalance’szero,andperformthetaringagain.
Weighing:Placetheitemstobeweighedontheweighingpan,andclosetheglassdraftshield(ifpresent).Assoonasthestabilitydetectoricon(thesmallcircletotheleftoftheweightdisplay)goesout,thedisplayisstableandyoucanreadofftheweighingresult.Thestabilitydetectoriconisstillvisibleinthisdiagram,andthereforetheweighingresultisnotstable.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
31
A
J
F
I
1
2
3
4
5 Basic principles for using the terminal and the software (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
ThisSectionexplainstheoperatinganddisplayelementsofyourterminal,andalsoexplainsthewaythesoftwareofyourbalanceistobeused.PleasereadthisSectioncarefully,becauseitisthebasisforalltheoperatingstepsthatareexplainedinlaterSections.
5.1 An overview of the terminalInthisSectionwewillfirstintroduceyoutothecontrolsoftheterminal(withtheexceptionofthe«On/Off»,«G»and«H»keys,whichhavealreadybeenexplainedinthepreviousSection).DetailedinformationonthedisplaywillbeprovidedinthenextSection.
1 «A»keyThiskeytakesyoudirectlyfromanymenulevelbacktotheactiveapplication.Anychangesmadeandconfirmeduptothispointareautomaticallysaved.
2 «I»keyYourbalanceisshippedfromthefactorywithstandardapplications(e.g.fornormalweighing,statistics,formulaweighinganddensitydetermination).Thiskeyallowsyou tochoose theapplicationwithwhichyouwant towork.
3 «J»keyAlargenumberofsettingsalloweachapplicationtobeideallymatchedtotheparticulartask.Youcallupthemenusforconfiguringtheactiveapplicationwiththiskey.
4 «F»keyPressingthiskeytransmitstheweighingresultovertheinterface,e.g.toaprinter.However,otherdevices,suchasaPCcanalsobeconnected.Thedatatransmittedcanbefreelyspecified.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
32
12
3
4a4b4
5.2 The displayTheilluminated,graphicdisplayofyourterminalisa“touchscreen”.Itisnotonlypossiblenotonlytoreaddataandsettings,butalsotomakesettingsandtoexecutefunctionsbytouchingthedisplayarea.
Thefactorysettingofthebalancedisplaystheweighingresultatasizesothatitcaneasilyberead.Inthisdisplaymodeneithertheinformationfieldsnorthegraphical“SmartTrac”fillingguidearevisible.
The“display”functionkeyallowstwofurtherdisplay modes tobeselected.Thenextdisplaymodeappearseach time thekey ispressed. In the twootherdisplaymodes,moreinformationisshownthaninthestandardmode,butthedisplayedweightitselfissmaller:
Display with information fields and “SmartTrac”.The weighing result displayed isreducedforreasonsofspace.
Display without information fields but with “SmartTrac”.Thesizeoftheweightdisplayisincreasedbecausetheinformationfieldsarenotdisplayed.
Thedisplayisdividedintodifferentzones(theillustrationshowsthedisplayincludinginformationfieldsand“SmartTrac”):
1 Thecurrentlyactive applicationisshownintheupperleft-handcorner.Bypressingthisareayoucallupthemenuinwhichyoumayselectthedesiredapplication(youcanalsoreachthismenuviathe«I»key).
2 Thedateorthetimeareshownintheupperright-handcorner.Youcanchangethedateorthetimebypressingthiszone.
3 Status icons:Thesesymbolsappearasneededandindicateanyspecialneedsofthebalance(e.g.,needsadjustment,needsservicing,changebatteries,etc.).AlistofallstatusiconscanbefoundinSection16.3.
4 Thecurrentweighing resultappearsinthisarea.Ifyoutouchtheweighingunit(4b)awindowappearsinwhichyoucanselectthedesiredweighingunit.
Ifyoupresstheweighingresult(4a)anotherwindowdisplaystheweighingresultinalargersize.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttoreadtheweighingresultfromsomedistanceaway.Thiswindowcanbeclosedagainbypressingthe“OK”buttononthescreen.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
33
I
J
56
7
5 Additionalinformation(information fields)relatedtotheactiveapplication,andwhichwillmakeyourworkeasier,aredisplayedinthisarea.
6 The“SmartTrac”isdisplayedinthisarea.Thisisagraphicalfillingguide,showingyouataglancetheweighingrangethathasalreadybeenfilledandtherangethatisstillavailable.
7 Thisareaisreservedforthefunction keysthatofferyoudirectaccesstofrequentlyneededfunctionsandsettingsforthecurrentlyactiveapplication.Ifmorethanfivefunctionkeysareactive,youcanswitchbetweenthemusingthearrowkeys(notshowninthediagram).
Intheothertwodisplaymodes(wheretheweighingresultislargerbutwherelessadditionalinformationisdisplayed)itisalsopossibletomakesettingsbytouchingthezonesthatarevisibleatthetime.
Note:Dependingoncountry-specificrules,oncertifiedversionsofbalancestheuncertifieddecimalplacesaredisplayedgray.
Screen saver
Ifthebalanceisnotusedfor15minutes,thebacklightingofthedisplayisautomaticallyswitchedoffandthepixelsareinvertedatintervalsofapproximately15seconds.Assoonasyoustarttoworkwiththebalanceagain(loadaweight,pressakey,etc.),thedisplayreturnstoitsnormalstate.
5.3 The balance software
Thesoftwarecontrolsallyoubalance’sfunctions.Italsoallowsthebalancetobeadjustedforaspecificworkingenvironment.Pleasetakenoteofthefollowingexplanations,astheyarethebasicprincipleforusingyourbalance.
Thesoftwareconsistsofthefollowingcomponents:
– Applications
– Application-specificsettings
– Systemsettings
Applications
Applicationsaresoftwaremodulesforcarryingoutspecificweighingtasks.Yourbalanceisshippedfromthefactorywithavarietyofstandardapplications(fornormalweighing,statistics,formulaweighing,densitydetermination,percentweighing,piececountingunddynamicweighing).Immediatelyafterbeingswitchedon,thebalancerunstheapplicationforordinaryweighing.Theapplicationsareaccessiblevia«I»key.YouwillfindinstructionsonworkingwiththestandardapplicationsstartingfromSection7.
Application-specific settings
Thesesettingsallowyoutoadaptapplicationstosuityourparticularneeds.Theadjustmentsthatcanbemadevaryaccordingtowhichapplicationhasbeenselected.Pressingthe«J»keyopensthemulti-pagemenuwiththesettingsforthecurrentlyactiveapplication.InformationabouttheindividualsettingpossibilitiescanbefoundintheSectiondescribingtheparticularapplication.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
34
I
Thefollowingdiagramillustratestheconnectionsbetweentheindividualcomponentsofthesoftware,andprovidesaninitialoverviewofatypicaloperatingprocedure.
Operating step
1. Select the application
2. Work
3. If desired: Changethesettingsforthe
chosenapplication(application-dependentsettings)
4. If desired: Changethesystemsettings
Confirmthesettingsbypressing“OK”orreturndirectlytotheapplicationwiththe«A»key.
Confirmthesettingsby pressing “OK”and“Exit”,orreturndirectlytotheactiveapplicationwiththe«A»key.
Example
I
J
I
System settings
Thesystemsettingsarenotapplication-dependent,andapplytotheentireweighingsystem(e.g.settingthedialoglanguage).Tocallupthesystemsettings,pressthe«I»keyandthenthe“System”button.YouwillfindinformationontheindividualpossiblesettingsinSection6.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
35
I
OnOff
J
I
OnOff
5.4 The typical operating sequenceThetypicaloperatingsequenceisdescribedbrieflybelow,withoutgoingintodetailaboutspecialapplication-specificfeatures.
Switch on the balance:Switchthebalanceonbybrieflypressingthe«On/Off»key.Immediatelyafterbeingswitchedon,thebalancerunsthemostrecentlyusedapplication.
Note:The display of your scales may differ from the example,dependingontheapplicationthatwasusedlastandonwhateversettingsweremade.
Select the application: If you do not want to work with thecurrentapplication,usethe«I»toselecttheapplicationmenu(oralternativelyby touching theappropriate zone in theupperleft-hand corner of the display).Touch the icon for the desiredapplication,andtherelevantsoftwarewillload.
Changeapplication-specific settings:Ifyouwanttochangethesettingsfortheactiveapplication,pressthe«J»key.Informationontheapplication-dependentsettingscanbefoundinthedescriptionofeachindividualapplication(Section7ff).
Change system settings:Ifyouwanttochangesystemsettingsthatapplytotheentireweighingsystem,i.e.toalltheapplications,thenpressthe«I»keyandthenthe“System”button.ThesystemsettingsaredescribedindetailinSection6.
Working:Carryoutthedesiredoperations.InformationonworkingwiththeindividualapplicationscanbefoundinSection7ff.
Switch off the balance:Aftercompletionofthework,switchoffthebalancebypressingandholdingdownthe«On/Off»key.
Basicprinciplesforusingtheterminalandthesoftware
36
5.5 The security system in your balanceYourbalance’ssystemsettings,orpartsofthem,canbeprotectedagainstunauthorizedmodificationsbymeansofapassword(de-tailedinformationcanbefoundinSection5.9).Apasswordisdefinedwhenthebalanceisshippedfromthefactory(seeSection5.9).However,themenusettingsarechosensothatyouhaveunrestrictedaccesstoallsystemsettings.
Ifyouwanttocalluppartofamenuthatisprotectedbythepassword,analphanumerickeyboardappearsonthedisplay.
Typeinthepassword.Observeupperandlowercase,usingthe“a...z”or“A...Z”buttontochangecase;numericalcharacterscanbeenteredbypressingthe“0...9”button.Youcanusethearrowkeytodeleteincorrectinputcharacterbycharacter.Forsecurityreasons,thepasswordisnotshowninplaintext,buttheindividualcharactersarerepresentedbyanasterisk.
Note:Youcancancelpassworddialogboxatanytimebypressing“C”.
Assoonasyouhaveenteredthewholeofthepassword,press“OK”.Ifthepasswordiscorrect,theselectedmenuwillappear.Otherwise,anerrormessagewillbedisplayedtogetherwiththeprompttore-enterthepassword.
WARNING: Note your password very carefully! If you forget the password, there is no way of recreating access to the protected menu area! We recommend that you write the password down and save it a safe place!
Systemsettings
37
IOpentheapplicationmenuwiththe«I»key,andthenpressthe“System”button.
6 System settings (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
Youwill learninthisSectionhowtoadapttheweighingsystemtosuityourrequirements.Thesystem settingsapplytotheentireweighingsystem,andthereforetoalltheapplications.Note:Youcanlearnabouttheapplication-dependentsettingsinthedescriptionofeachapplication.
6.1 Calling up the system settings
6.2 An overview of the system settingsThesystemsettingsarerepresentedbyicons.Theindividualsettingscanbecalledupandmodifiedbypressingtheicons.Thearrowkeysallowyoutoswitchbetweentheindividualmenupages.ThefollowingSectionscontaindetailedinstructionsonthesettingsthatcanbemade.
Thefollowingsystemsettingsareavailableonthefirstmenupage:
“Adjust/Test”: Settingsforadjustment(calibration)andforthetestfunctionsthatcheckthecalibration(Section6.3).
“Wghparam” Settings (weighing parameters) for adjusting the balance to aparticularweighingtask(Section6.4).
“Language”: Selectdialoglanguage(Section6.5).
“Peripherals”: Configuring the interface for various peripheral devices(Section6.6).
Thefollowingsystemsettingsarefoundonthesecondmenupage:
“Terminal”: Settingsforthedisplay(brightnessetc.)andforthebehavioroftheterminal(Section6.7).
“Date/Time”: Inputofdateandtime,andselectionofthedesireddisplayformat(Section6.8).
“Rights”: Assignmentofaccessrightsandpasswordsforweighingfunctionsandmenus(Section6.9).
“Standby": Settingsforthe“Standby”mode(Section6.10).
Thefollowingsystemsettingsareavailableonthethirdmenupage:
“Switch”: Settingsforexternalmomentarycontactswitches(Section6.11).
“Factory”: Restoringthefactorysettings(Section6.12).
“BalanceInfo”: Display/printoutofbalanceinformation(Section6.13).
Aftermakingallthenecessarysettings,pressthe“Exit”buttonorthe«A»keytoreturntotheactiveapplication.Inthefollowingsectionswepresentthevarioussystemsettingsindetail.
Note:Aftertheinstallationofspecialinterfaceoptions(e.g.Ethernet),theadditionalsystemsettingssymbolshownatleftisdisplayedshowingglobalsettingsfortheseinterfaces.Thesesettingsaredescribedintheinstructionswhichweresuppliedwiththeoptionalinterface.
Systemsettings
38
6.3 Settings for calibration and tests
Inthesemenusyoucanmakeallthesettingsassociatedwiththeadjustment(calibration)ofyourbalance.
In the following subsections you will find information on all the possible settings foradjustment,testingproceduresandtheirrecording.
6.3.1 Fully automatic adjustment function “FACT”
Youcanmakethesettingsforfullyautomaticadjustmentusingtheinternaladjustmentweight in thismenu(FACT).FACT (FullyAutomaticCalibrationTechnology)calibratesthe balance under full automatic control on the basis of a pre-selected temperaturecriterion.Note:Withthecertifiedversionsofbalances,thisoptioncannotbeselected,i.e.FACTisalwaysactive.
Thefollowingsettingsareavailable:“Off”
Fullyautomaticadjustment,FACT,isswitched off.“On”
Fullyautomaticadjustment,FACT,isswitched on.
The “Define” button permits you to specify the behavior of the FACT adjustmentfunction:
– “Temperature Criterion” specifies the ambient temperature at which automaticadjustmentshouldbetriggered.Ifyouselect“Off”,automaticcalibrationonthebasisofatemperaturecriterionwillnottakeplace.
– “Protocol Trigger”specifieswhetheranadjustment reportshouldbeprintedauto-matically.Ifyouselect“Off”,automaticprintoutswillnotbemade.If“On”isselected,arecordwillautomaticallybeprintedoutwheneverthebalanceundergoesautomaticadjustment.
“CalInfo”
AlthoughtheFACTtemperaturecriterionisactive,automaticadjustmentwillnottakeplacewhenthecriterionissatisfied.Insteadofthis,astatusiconwillappearintheupperrightareaofthedisplay(Section16.3),promptingtheusertocarryoutmanualadjustment,eitherwiththeinternalorexternaladjustmentweight.
Menu factory settings: “FACT”: active(“On”) “Temp.Criterion”: model-dependent “ProtocolTrigger”: “On”
Systemsettings
39
6.3.2 Define external adjustment weight
Ifyouworkwithanexternaladjustmentweight,youcanspecifyitspropertieshere(Note:Inaccordancewith country-specific regulations, this functionmaynotnecessarily beavailableoncertifiedbalances).
Thefollowingsettingsareavailable:
“Weight”
Youcanspecify theweightof theexternaladjustmentweighthere.Anumerical inputwindowappears.Enterthemassoftheexternaladjustmentweight(ingrams).
Setting range: model-dependent
“ID”
Youcanassignanidentifiertotheadjustmentweightusedhere(max.20characters).Thismakesiteasiertoidentifytheadjustmentweight.Theidentifieroftheweightcanbeprintedoutonthecalibrationrecord.Theinputwindowallowsalphanumericcharacterstobeentered.
Factory setting: nothingisspecified
“Certificate No.”
Adjustmentweightsareusuallysuppliedwithacertificate.Youcanenterthenameornumberofthesuppliedcertificatehere(max.20characters).Thisallowstheusedadjustmentweighttobeclearlyassignedtoaparticularcertificate.Thenameofthecertificatecanbeprintedoutonthecalibrationrecord.ThesamealphanumericinputwindowappearsasisusedfortheID.
Factory setting: nothingisspecified
Systemsettings
40
6.3.3 Define external test weight
Ifyouuseanexternalweighttocheckthecalibration,youcanenteritsproperties(weight,IDandcertificatenumber)here.
Thesamesettingsandinputwindowasareusedtodefineanexternaladjustmentweight,describedintheprevioussection,areavailable.
Factory setting: model-dependent
6.3.4 Define adjustment and test printouts
Inthismenu,whichcoverstwopages,youcanspecifytheinformationtobeprintedontheadjustmentandtestrecords.
Youcanactivatethedesiredinformationbypressingtheappropriateboxes.Thoseitemsofinformationthathaveatickwillbeprintedout.Youcanreturntothefactorysettingbypressing“STD”.Press“OK”tosavethechanges(orpress“C”toleavetheinputwindowwithoutsaving).
Thefollowingitemsofrecordinformationareavailable:
“Date/Time”
Thedateandtimeoftheadjustmentareprintedoutinthespecifieddateandtimeformat(Section6.8).
“Balance Type”
Thisinformationisstoredintheweighingplatformandintheterminal,andcannotbechangedbytheuser.
“SNR”
Theserialnumbersoftheterminalandoftheweighingplatformareprintedout.Thesearestoredintheweighingplatformorintheterminal,andcannotbechangedbytheuser.
“SW Version”
Theversionnumbersofthebalancesoftware(onenumbereachfortheterminalandtheweighingplatform)areprintedout.
“Weight ID”
The identification specified for an external adjustment weight is printed out(Section6.3.2).
“Certificate No.”
Thenamespecifiedforthecertificateassociatedwithanexternaladjustmentweightisprintedout(Section6.3.2).
“Temperature”
Thetemperatureatthetimeoftheadjustmentisprintedout.
Systemsettings
41
Sampleprintoutofa testusinganexter-nal adjustment weight (with all print-outoptionsselected)
---- External test -----28.Jul 2004 14:50
METTLER TOLEDO
Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890SW WeighBridge 1.02SW Terminal 1.14Weight ID ETW-5000/RCertificate No. MT-412
Temperature 22.6 °C Nominal Weight 5000.00 gActual 5000.12 g Diff 0.12 g
Test done
Signature
........................------------------------
“Nominal Weight”
Thetargetweightfortheadjustment/testisprintedout(onlyinthecaseofadjustment/testingwithanexternalweight,Section6.3.2).
“Actual Weight”
Themeasurement(actualweight)fromthetestisprintedout(onlyinthecaseoftestingwithanexternalweight,Section6.3.3).
“Diff.”
Thedifferencebetweenthetargetandactualweightsisprintedout(onlywhentestingwithanexternalweight).
“Signature”
Anadditionallineisprintedoutwheretherecordcanbesigned.
Factory setting: “Date/Time”,“BalanceType”,“SNR”,“Nominalweight”,“ActualWeight”,“Diff.”and“Signature”.
6.4 Specify balance parametersYoucanadaptthebalancetoyourspecificrequirementsinthesemenus.Note:Accesstothebalanceparameterscanbeprotectedbyapassword(Section6.9);inthatcaseyouwillbeaskedtoenterthepasswordwhenselectingthebalanceparameters.
In the following subsections you will find information about the individual balanceparametersandabouttheavailablesettings.
Systemsettings
42
6.4.3 Speed of the value release
Withthissettingyoucanspecifyhowrapidlythebalanceconsidersthemeasurementtobestableandthereforereleasesthevalue.The“Veryfast”settingisrecommendedifyourequirerapidmeasurementswhoserepeatabilityisoflowersignificance.The“Veryreliable”settingleadstomeasurementsthatarehighlyrepeatable,butitlengthensthesettlingtime.Threeotherintermediatesettingscanbeselected.
Factory setting: “Reliable+Fast”
6.4.4 Automatic zero setting
Automaticzerosetting(“AutoZero”)continuouslycorrectspossiblevariationsinthezeropointthatmightbecausedthroughsmallamountsofcontaminationontheweighingpan.
Youcanusethismenuoptiontoswitchtheautomaticzerosettingonoroff.
Factory setting: “On”(switchedon)
6.4.1 Adaptation to the type of balance
BysettingtheWeighingModeyouadaptthebalancetotheweighingtype.Selectthe“Universal”weighingmodeforallordinaryweighingprocesses,or“Dosing”todispenseliquidorpowdermaterials.Withthissettingthebalancereactsveryquicklytoverysmallchangesinweight.The“SensorMode”settingsuppliesaweighingsignalwhichisfilteredtoanextentwhichdependson thesetting for theenvironmentalconditions.Thefilterbehaveslinearlyinrelationtotime(notadaptively)andissuitableforthecontinuousprocessingofmeasurementvalues.Underthe“Checkweighing”settingthebalanceonlyrespondstolargechangesinweight,andthemeasurementisthereforeverystable. Note: Thenumberofsettingsavailabledependsonthemodel.
Factory setting: “Universal”
6.4.2 Adaptation to the ambient conditions
Withthissettingthebalancecanbeideallyadjustedtomatchtheambientconditionsatitslocation.Ifyouareworkinginanenvironmentwhichispracticallyfreefromdraftsandvibrations,choosethe“Stable”setting.If,ontheotherhand,youworkinanenvironmentwheretheconditionsarecontinuouslychanging,select“Unstable”or“Veryunstable”.The“Standard”settingcorrespondstoanaverageworkingenvironmentsubjecttomoderatevariationsintheambientconditions. Note: Thenumberofsettingsavailabledependsonthemodel.
Factory setting: “Standard”
Systemsettings
43
6.5 Select dialog languageInthismenuyouselectthelanguageinwhichyouwishtocommunicatewiththebalance.
Factory setting: Depends on the language package installed. Usually thelanguageispresettothatofthecountryforwhichthebalanceisintended.
6.6 Select peripheral devices
Anumberofdifferentperipheraldevicescantheconnectedtotheinterface(s)ofyourbalance.Inthismenuyoucanspecifywhichdeviceisconnected,andwithwhichparameterstheinterfaceshouldoperate.
Thefollowingsettingsmaybechosen:
– “Printer”: Printer (Note regarding printed reports: Depending oncountry-specificrules,oncertifiedversionsofbalancestheuncertifieddecimalplacesaredisplayedinbrackets.)
– “Host”: External computer (bi-directional communication; thebalancecansenddatatothePC,andcanreceivecommandsordatafromit)
– “SecondaryDisplay”: Secondarydisplay
– “BarCode”: Barcodereader
– “Ext.Keyboard”: ExternalPCkeyboard
Specificfacilitiesforadjustingtheinterfaceareavailableforeachofthesedevices:“Off”meansthatnodeviceofthistypeistobeconnected.“RS232built-in”referstotheRS232Cinterfacefittedatthefactory.Ifother,optionalinterfacesarepresent,thesearedisplayed(asisthesecondserialinterface,“RS232Option”,intheexampleshownhere).Atthispoint,however,onlytheparametersfortheRS232Cinterfacefittedatthefactoryareexplained.Important:Youcanonlyactivateonedeviceforeachinterfacethatispresent,andallotherdevicesmustbedeactivated(“Off”).Ifyouactivateanewdevice,thepreviouslyselecteddeviceisautomaticallydeactivated.
Systemsettings
44
Ifyouhaveactivatedadeviceyoucanadjusttheinterfaceparametersforcommunicationwiththatdevicewiththe“Define”button(baudrate,bit/parity,stopbits,Handshake,endofline,characterset,andcontinuousmode).
Factory setting: “Host” (9600baud,8databits/noparity,1stopbit,Xon/Xoffprotocol,
Endoflinecharacter<CR><LF>,ANSI/WINDOWScharacterset,ContinuousmodeOff)
Important:Toensurethatspecialcharacters(e.g.“°C”)areprintedoutcorrectlyonMETTLERTOLEDOprinters,balance and printermustbesetto8 data bits.
Note:Foroperationwithaprinter,under“Char Set”thesettingIBM/DOSmustbeselected.
If under“Host” thebuilt-inRS232C interfacehasbeen selected, youcanadditionallyactivateContinuous mode.
In“Continuousmode”youcanspecifyvariousdifferentdataformats(MT–SICS,PM,AT/MT)dependingonwhichperipheraldeviceisconnected.Youcanalsospecifytheupdateratepersecond(2,5,6,10).
Factory setting: “Outputformat”:MT–SICS,“Updates/sec”:5
Systemsettings
45
6.7 Terminal settingsInthismenuyoucanadapttheterminaltosuityourneedsandcanadjustthedisplay.
Thefollowingparametersareavailable:
“Brightness”
Here you can adjust the brightness of the display. Use the arrow keys to adjust thebrightnessbetween20%and100%(instepsof20%)as required.Thebrightness ismodifiedimmediatelyeachtimeeitherofthearrowkeysispressed,sothatyoucanseethechangestraightaway.
Factory setting: 80%
Note:Ifthebalanceisnotusedfor15minutes,thebrightnessofthedisplayisautomaticallyreducedto20%.Thisextendstheservicelifeofthebackillumination.Thebrightnessisimmediatelyreturnedtothevaluethathasbeenselectedhereassoonaseitherakeyispressedortheweightchanges.
“Contrast”
Adjustingthedisplaycontrast(rangeofsettings0%–100%Contrast).Thesettingsaremadeinasimilarwaytothoseforbrightness,butin2%steps.
Factory setting: 50%
“Sound”
Settingthevolumeofthebeep(settingrange0%–100%instepsof10%).Selecting0%switchesthebeepoff.Asliderisprovidedtomakethesetting,similartotheadjustmentsforbrightnessandcontrast.
Factory setting: 70%
“Touch Function”
Ifyouswitchoffthe“touchscreen”function,thedisplaynolongerreactstotouchwheninweighingmode,whichmeansthatyouarenolongerabletomakesettingssimplybypressingthedisplay(exception:functionkeys).Important:Thecontactfunctionisalwaysactiveinsettingmode,sinceotherwiseitwouldbeimpossibletomakeadjustments.
Factory setting: “On”
“Touch adjustment”
Ifyouhave the impression that thebalance isno longer reactingcorrectlywhenyoupresscertainlocationsonthedisplay,youcanadjustthetouchscreen.Afterpressingthe“Activate”keyawindowopensinwhichyouareaskedtopresstheflashingarea.Thisprocedureisrepeatedanumberoftimes(itispossibletostopatanytimebypressingthe“C”key).
Systemsettings
46
6.8 Date and timeInthismenuyoucanenterthedateandtime,andcanselecttheirdisplayformat.Youcanalsospecifywhetherthedateorthetimearetoappearonthedisplay.
Thefollowingoptionscanbeset:
“Date Format”(forthedisplay)
Thefollowingdateformatsareavailable:
“D.MMMYYYY” Displayexample: 28.Jul2004
“MMMDYYYY” Displayexample: Jul282004
“DD.MM.YYYY” Displayexample: 28.07.2004
“MM/DD/YYYY” Displayexample: 07/28/2004
Factory setting: “D.MMM.YYYY”
“Date”
Setting thecurrentdate.Anumerical inputwindowappears.Enter thecurrentdate intheformat day–month–year (DD.MM.YYYY),regardlessofwhichdateformatyouhaveselectedfordisplaypurposes.
Note:Youcanalsomakethesettingdirectlybypressingthedateinweighingmode.Awindowappearsinwhichyoucandirectlyenterthedate.
“Time Format”(forthedisplay)
Youcanspecifytheformatinwhichthetimeistobedisplayedhere.Thefollowingtimeformatsareavailable:
“24:MM” Displayexample: 15:04“12:MM” Displayexample: 3:04PM“24.MM” Displayexample: 15.04“12.MM” Displayexample: 3.04PM
Factory setting: “24:MM”
“Time”
Setting the current time. Enter the current time in the24 hour format (hh.mm.ss),regardlessofwhichtimeformatyouhaveselectedfordisplaypurposes.Theinputwindowissimilartothatforthedate.The“+1H”and“–1H”buttonsarealsoavailable,andwiththeseyoucansetthecurrenttimeforwardsorbackwardsbyonehour.Thismakesiteasytoadjustforsummerorwintertime.Note:Youcanalsosetthetimedirectlybypressingthetimedisplayinweighingmode.
Systemsettings
47
“Date/Time Display”
Youcanspecifywhether thedateor the time is tobeshown in theupper right-handcornerofthedisplay:
“Date” Thedateisshownonthedisplay“Time” Thetimeisshownonthedisplay
Factory setting: “Date”
6.9 Define access rights and specify the passwordInthismenuyoucandefineandspecifyapasswordthatcanbeusedtoprotectmenuareas.
Thefollowingsettingsareavailable:
“Password”
Afterpressingthe“Define”button,analphanumericinputboxappears.Thefactorysettingis“0”.Enterthedesiredpassword(max.20characters)andconfirmtheinputwith“OK”.Thepasswordmaycontainlettersandnumbers.Ifyouuseupperandlowercaseletters,thesemustalsobeenteredlaterwhenenteringthepassword.
Note: Ifyouclearanexistingpasswordusingthearrowkeys,anddonotenteranewpassword,anerrormessageappears.
Factory setting: “0”(Zero)
“System”
You specify here whether the entire system settings area is to be protected with thepassword.Ifyouselect“NoProtection”allthesystemsettingsarefreelyaccessible.Toprotectthesystemsettings,select“Password”.Thepasswordwillthenberequiredeverytimethesystemsettingsarecalledup.
Factory setting: “NoProtection”
“Wghparam”
Thissettingallowsyoutoprotecttheweighingparameters(partofthesystemsettings,seeSection6.4)fromunauthorizedaccess(“Password”)ortocancelexistingpasswordprotection(“NoProtection”).Theothersystemsettingsarefreelyaccessibleunlesstheyarealsoindividuallyprotected(seeabove).
Factory setting: “NoProtection”
“Access Rights”
Thissettingallowsyoutoprotecttheaccessrights(thepartofthesystemsettingsinwhichyouarepresentlyworking)fromunauthorizedaccess.Thispreventsunauthorizedmodificationofthepasswordandoftheaccessrights.
Factory setting: “NoProtection”
Systemsettings
48
WARNING: If you forget the password, there is no way of recreating access to the protected menu area! If you have protected either the system settings as a whole or just the access rights with a password, then it is no longer possible to define another password or to remove the password protection! We therefore recommend that you write the password down and save it a safe place! If you are unable to find the password, please contact the METTLER TOLEDO customer service department.
6.10 Energy saving function (standby)Inthismenuyoucanspecifythelengthoftimeforwhichthebalanceistobeinactivebeforeitswitchesautomaticallyinto“standby”mode.
Youcanswitchtheenergysavingfunctionoff(“Off”),oryoucanspecifyaperiodof30,60,120or240minutesafterwhichthebalanceistoswitchitselfintostandbymode.Thestandbymodeisthesamestateintowhichthebalanceenterswhenswitchedoffwiththe«On/Off»key.The«On/Off»keymustbepressedtoturnthebalanceonagain.
Factory setting: “Off”(standbymodedeactivated)
Note:Thebrightnessofthedisplayisreducedautomaticallyifthebalanceisnotusedforaperiodof15minutes,regardlessofthesettingforthestandbymode(Section5.7).
6.11 Settings for external keys (Aux connections)TheMETTLERTOLEDO“ErgoSens”canbeconnectedtothe“Aux1”and“Aux2”connectionsonyourbalance,andthesecanbeusedtoexecutecertainweighingfunctions.Afunctionisassignedtoeach“ErgoSens”inthismenu.
Selectthedesiredfunctionforeach“ErgoSens”:“Print”,zerosetting(«G»)ortaring(«H»).Ifno“ErgoSens”isconnectedtothecorrespondingAuxconnection,orifyouwanttodeactivateit,select“Off”.
Factory setting: “Off”
Systemsettings
49
6.12 Loading the factory settingsInthismenuyoucanreturnallthesettingsinthebalancetothefactorysettings.
Please note: This reset will affect all the system settings as well as all the application-specific settings!
Forsecurityreasonsyouwillbepromptedtoconfirmwhetheryoureallywanttoloadthefactorysettings.Select“OK”toloadthefactorysettings,or“C”toretainthesettingsthathavebeenmadeuptonow.
Thebalancewillrestartafteryouhaveconfirmedthereset.Allthesystemsettingsandtheapplication-specificsettingshavetobemadeagain.
6.13 Access balance informationYoucanspecifyanidentifierforyourbalanceinthismenuandcanaccessthebalanceinformation.
Thefollowingoptionsareavailable:
“Balance ID”
Youcanassignanidentifiertoyourbalancehere(max.20characters).Thismakesiteasiertoidentifyindividualbalancesinplantswheremorethanonebalanceisused.Theinputwindowallowsalphanumericcharacterstobeentered.
Factory setting: nothingisspecified
Systemsettings
50
SystemAdjust/Test FACT OnFACT FACT Temp.Criterion 1 KelvinProtocol Trigger OnAdjustweight 5000.00 gWeight 5000.00 g ID ECW-5000/1Certificate No. MT-414/ATestweight 5000.00 gWeight 5000.00 g ID ETW-5000/RCertificate No. MT-412Protocol Date/Time xBalance Type xSNR xSW-Version -Weight ID -Certificate No. -Temperature -Nominal Weight xActual Weight xDiff xSignature xWghparam Weighing Mode UniversalEnvironment StandardValue Release Reliable+FastAutoZero OnLanguageLanguage English
“Balance Information”
After pressing the“Show” button a window opens containing information about thebalanceandthebuilt-inoptions.Thisinformationisofparticularsignificanceforservicetechnicians.IfyouringtheMETTLERTOLEDOcustomerservicedepartmentyoushouldhavethisinformationathand.
Bypressingthe«F»keyyoucanprintout thebalanceinformation(assumingthataprinterisconnectedandhasbeenactivatedasanoutputdeviceintheperipheraldevicesettings).
6.14 Printing the system settings
Aslongasyouareinthesystemsettingsarea,youcanprintthemoutatanytimebypressingthe«F»key(assumingthataprinterisconnectedandhasbeenactivatedasanoutputdeviceintheperipheraldevicesettings).
Thediagramhereshowsasectionofaprintoutofsystemsettings.
Thesystemsettingsoftheopenwindowandthesettingsoftherelatedsubmenuareprintedout.
The“Weighing”application
51
J
I
7 The “Weighing” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
In thisSectionwedescribe the“Weighing”application.Youwill find informationhereaboutpracticalaspectsofworkingwith thisapplicationandaboutitsspecificsettings.(InformationaboutthesystemsettingsthatarenotspecifictotheapplicationaretobefoundinSection6.)
7.1 Select the application
Unlessthe“Weighing”applicationisalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Pressthe“Weighing”iconintheselectionwindow.Thebalanceisthenreadyforweighing.
7.2 Settings for the “Weighing” applicationYouhavealreadylearntinSection4howasimpleweighingprocessiscarriedout.Inadditiontotheoperatingsequencesdescribedthere(zerosetting,taringandtheexecutionofasimpleweighingprocedure),yourbalanceoffersyouawiderangeoffacilitiesforadaptingthe“Weighing”proceduretoyourspecificrequirements.
7.2.1 Overview
Theapplication-specificsettingscanbeaccessedviathe«J»key.Thefirstofatotaloffourmenupagesappearsafterpressingthiskey.
Thefollowingsettingsareavailableforthe“Weighing”application:
“Function Keys”: Youcanspecifyherethefunctionkeysthataretoappearatthebottom edge of the display.These keys allow direct access tospecificfunctions(Section7.2.2).
“Info Field”: You can specify the information fields that are to appear here(Section7.2.3).
“AutoPrint”: You can choose here whether the weighing result shouldautomaticallybeprintedout(Section7.2.4).
Youcanaccessthenextmenupagebypressingthebuttonwiththearrowsymbol.
“Display Unit”: Specifies the unit in which the result will be displayed(Section7.2.5).
“Info Unit”: Specifiesanadditionalweightunitthatappearsinthedisplayasaninformationfield(Section7.2.5).
“Custom Unit”: Definitionofauniqueweightunit1(Section7.2.6).
Youcanreturntothepreviousmenupageormoveontothenextpagebypressingoneofthebuttonswiththearrowsymbol.
The“Weighing”application
52
Weighing Function Keys ID -Display 2Lotcounter -Adjust.int 1Adjust.ext -Test int -Test ext 41/10d 3Header -Footer -Info Field ID1 -ID2 -ID3 -Info Unit -Tare 1Gross 2AutoPrint OffDisplay Unit g
Thefollowingsettingsareavailableonthethirdmenupage:
“Protocol”: Selecttheinformationthatistoappearontheweighingprintout(Section7.2.7).
“Print Key”: Specifiesthebehaviorofthe«F»keyformanuallyprintingweighingresults(Section7.2.8).
“Transfer Key”: Formatsthedatathatareoutputwiththe“Transfer”functionkey(Section7.2.9).
Thefollowingsettingsareavailableonthefourthmenupage:
“Identification”: Definitionofidentifications(Section7.2.10).
“Bar Code”: Thesesettingsareonlyrelevantifabarcodereaderisconnected.Youcanspecifyhowitsdataistobehandled(Section7.2.11).
“Ext. Keyboard”: Thesesettingsareonlyrelevantifanexternalkeyboardisconnected.Allowsyoutospecifyhowkeyboardinputsaretobeprocessed(Section7.2.12).
After making all the necessary settings, press the “OK” button to return to theapplication.
Inthefollowingsectionswewillpresentthevarioussettingsforthe“Weighing”applicationindetail.
Printing out the application-specific settings:
Aslongasyouareintheareafortheapplication-specificsettings,youcanprintoutthesettingsatanytimebypressingthe«F»key(assumingthataprinterisconnectedandhasbeenactivatedasanoutputdeviceinthesystemsettings).
ThediagramhereshowsaSectionofaprintoutofapplication-specificsettings.
The“Weighing”application
53
7.2.2 Select function keysFunctionkeysofferyoudirectaccesstospecificfunctionsandsettingsfortheapplication.Thefunctionkeysareshownintheapplicationontheloweredgeofthedisplay(seeSection4.2).Thecorrespondingfunctionisinitiatedbypressingoneofthebuttons.
Inthismenuyoucanspecifywhichfunctionsshouldbemadeavailableintheapplication.
Thefunctionkeysthathaveanumberwillbedisplayedintheapplication.Thenumbersspecifythesequenceofthefunctionkeysonthedisplay.Ifyouactivateordeactivateafunctionkeybypressingit,thesequenceofthekeysisautomaticallyupdated.Tospecifyacompletelynewsequence,firstdeactivateallthefunctionkeys,thenactivatethemagaininthedesiredsequence.Youcanreturntothefactorysettingbypressing“STD”.Press“OK”tosavethechanges(orpress“C”toleavetheinputwindowwithoutsaving).
Thefollowingfunctionkeysareavailable.
“ID”: Thisfunctionkeyallowsyoutoassignidentifiers(descriptivetexts)toindividualweighingprocesses.Thesewillbeincludedintheprintouts.Afterpressingthefunctionkey,awindowappearsinwhichyouselecttheID,afterwhichyoucanenterthedesiredtext.YouwillfindinformationonthedefinitionoftheidentifiersinSection7.2.10.PracticalnotesonworkingwithidentifiersmaybefoundinSection7.3.3.
“Display”: Thisfunctionkeyallowsyoutoswitchbetweenthreedifferenttypesofdisplay(Section5.2).
“Lotcounter”: This function key allows you to enter an initial value for the item counter(Section7.3.2).
“Adjust.int.”and“Adjust.ext.”: Adjustmentofthebalanceusinganinternalorexternaladjustmentweight.YouwillfindnotesonexecutingandrecordingtheadjustmentinSection7.4.
“Test int.”and“Test ext.”: Checkingthebalanceadjustmentusinganinternalorexternaltestweight.YouwillfindnotesoncarryingoutthetestinSection7.4.
“1/10d”: This function key allows you to modify the readability of the weighing result(Section7.3.1).
“Header”and“Footer”: Thesefunctionkeysprinttheheaderandfooterlinesoftheprintoutrespectively(Section7.2.7).
“Transfer”: Thisfunctionkeyallowsthecurrentweightvaluetobesentdirectlytotheconnectedhostcomputer,withoutadditionaldata(additionalinformation).Ifdesired,theoutputdatacanbeformatted(Section7.2.9).
Factory setting: “Adjust.int.”,“Display”and“1/10d”areactivated(inthissequence).
The“Weighing”application
54
7.2.3 Select information fieldsThe information fields provide continuous information about set values, measured results and so forth.The information fields aredisplayedintheapplicationunderneaththeweighingresult.Note:Theinformationfieldsareonlyshowninthedisplaymodeinwhichtheweightitselfisrepresentedonasmallscale.Intheothertwodisplaymodes,thelargerdisplayoftheweightusesthespacetakenbytheinformationfields(Section5.2).
In this menu you can specify which information fields should be displayed in theapplication.
Theinformationfieldsthathaveanumberwillbedisplayedintheapplication.Thenumbersspecifythesequenceoftheinformationfieldsonthedisplay.Important:Forreasonsofspace,amaximumofthreeinformationfieldscanbedisplayed.Ifyouactivatemorethanthreeinformationfields,onlythefirstthreewillinfactappearonthedisplay.Ifyouactivateordeactivateaninformationfieldbypressingit,thesequenceofthefieldsisautomaticallyupdated.Tospecifyacompletelynewsequence,firstdeactivatealltheinformationfields,thenactivatethemagaininthedesiredsequence.Youcanreturntothefactorysettingwith“STD”,while“C”allowsyoutoleavetheinputwindowwithoutsaving.Ifyouwishtosaveyourchanges,press“OK”.
Thefollowinginformationfieldsareavailable:
“ID1”,“ID2”and“ID3”: Theseinformationfieldsdisplaytheidentifiersenteredbymeansofthe“ID”functionkey.Note:Theidentifiersthathavebeenspecifiedaredisplayed,not“ID1”,“ID2”and“ID3”(Section7.2.10).
“Info Unit”: Thisinformationfielddisplaystheweghingresultinthesecondweighingunitthatyouhavechosen(Section7.2.5).
“Tare”: Thisinformationfielddisplaysthecurrenttarevalue(inthesameunitofweightastheweighingresultinthemaindisplay).
“Gross”: Thisinformationfielddisplaysthecurrentgrossweight(inthesameunitofweightastheweighingresultinthemaindisplay).
Factory setting: Noinformationfieldsareactivated.
7.2.4 Selections for automatic printoutsWiththismenuoptionyoucanspecifywhethertheweighingresultshouldautomaticallybeprintedout.
“Off”: Theweighingresultisnotautomaticallyprintedout,andthe«F»keymustbepressedtoprinttheresult.
“On”: Theweighingresultisautomaticallyprintedout,providedthenetweightisofatleastacertainvalue(dependentonthemodelofthebalance).Theinformationthatisprintedoutiswhatyouhavespecifiedforprintingindividualvalues(Section6.2.7).
Factory setting: “Off”.
The“Weighing”application
55
7.2.5 Select weighing unitsYoucanspecifytheweighingunitswithwhichyouwanttoworkinthe“DisplayUnit”and“InfoUnit”menus.Iftwodifferentunitsarechosen,youcanhavetheweighingresultdisplayedintwodifferentweighingunitsatthesametime.
Thesamerangeofunitscanbeselectedforthe“DisplayUnit”asforthe“InfoUnit”(seealsotheconversiontableinSection18.1).Note:Dependingoncountry-specificrules,oncertifiedversionsofbalancessomeweighingunitsmaynotbeavailable.
If the“Display Unit” is changed, both the current measured weight and the valuesdisplayed in the“Tare” and“Gross” information fields (Section 7.2.3) appear in thenewweighingunit.
The“info Unit”isusedfortheinformationfieldofthesamename(Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: Dependsonthemodel(forbothunits).
7.2.6 Define freely selectable weighing unitsYoucandefineyourownweighingunit in the“CustomUnit”menu.Thispermitscalculationstobecarriedout immediatelyastheweighingresultisfound(e.g.forsurfaceareasorvolumes).Thefreelyselectableweighingunitisavailableinallthemenusandinputfieldswhereweighingunitscanbechosen.
Thefollowingfieldsareavailableinordertodefinethefreelyselectableweighingunit:
“Formula”: Thisiswhereyoucanspecifyhowthevaluewhichwillbespecifiedbelowunder“Factor”istobeappliedtothecalculation.Twoformulasareavailable,inwhich“F”representsthefactor,while“Net”representsthevalueoftheweighingresult.Inthefirstformula,thenetweightismultipliedbythefactor,whereasinthesecondformulathefactorisdividedbythenetweight.Theformulacan,forinstance,beusedtocompensateimmediatelyforaknownerrorfactorintheweightdetermination.
“Factor (F)”: Hereyoucanspecifythefactor(>0…max.10000000)thatistobeusedtomodifythe(net)weighingresult(inaccordancewiththepreviouslyselectedformula).
“Name”: Enteranameforyourfreeweighingunit(max.4characters).Note:Itisnotpermittedtoenterweightunits(“g”,“kg”,etc.),andthesewillberejectedwithanerrormessage.
“Result Output.Form”: Youcanspecifytheformattingoftheweighingresulthere.Example:Asettingof“0.05”definestwodecimalfiguresroundedtothenearest5(thiswouldmeanthatameasuredresultof123.4777wouldbedisplayedas123.50).Note:Thisfunctioncanonlybeusedtoreduce thereadabilityoftheresults.Donotenteravaluethatexceedsthemaximumreadabilityofyourbalance!
Factory setting: Nofreeweighingunitisdefined(“Off”)
The“Weighing”application
56
------- Weighing -------28.Jul 2004 19:40Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890Customer Smith Inc. Order RP_222 Lot 09-34
Signature
........................
Forthesakeofclarity,thislargemenuisdividedintothreesubmenusinwhichyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheprintoutheader,theprintingoftheindividualvalues,andforthefooter.
Options for the printout header
Inthissubmenuyoucanspecifytheinformationthatistobeprintedatthetopoftheweighingprintout(beforetheresultsthemselves).Theheaderwillautomaticallybeprintedifitisdefinedasanelementoftheweighingprintout(see“Optionsforprintingouttheindividualvalues”overleaf).Itcan,however,alsobeenprintedoutseparatelybypressingthe“Header”functionkey.Examinethesampleprintoutillustratedhere.
Youcanactivatethedesiredinformationbypressingtheappropriateboxes.Thoseitemsofinformationthathaveatickwillbeprintedout.Youcanreturntothefactorysettingwith“STD”,while“C”allowsyoutoleavetheinputwindowwithoutsaving.Ifyouwishtosaveyourchanges,press“OK”.
Thefollowingheaderoptionsareavailable:
“Blank Line”: Anemptylineisinserted.
“Appl. Name”: Thenameoftheapplicationisprinted(“Weighing”).
“Date/Time”: Thecurrentdateandtimeareprinted.
“Balance Type”: Themodelofthebalanceisreadfromtheinternalelectronics,andcannotbechangedbytheuser.
“SNR”: Theserialnumbersoftheterminalandoftheweighingplatformarereadfromthebalance’selectronics,andcannotbechanged.
“ID1”,“ID2”,“ID3”: The identifiers specified by means of the“ID” function key areprinted(Section7.3.3).
“Signature”: Insertsadottedlinewheretheprintoutcanbesigned.
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(theapplication’sidentifier)isactivated.
7.2.7 Define printoutInthismenuyoucanspecifytheinformationthatistoappearontheweighingprintout.
The“Weighing”application
57
T 54.37 g N 868.24 g G 922.61 g N 0.86824 kg
Options for printing out the individual values
Inthissubmenuyoucanspecifytheinformationthatistobeprintedforeveryindividualweighingresult(afterpressingthe«F»key).
Thefollowinginformationisavailableforinclusionontheprintoutsofweights:
“Header”: Theinformationspecifiedfortheheaderisprinted(seepreviousparagraph).
“Blank Line”: Anemptylineisinserted.
“ID1”,“ID2”,“ID3”: Theidentifiersthathavebeenenteredthroughthefunctionkeyswiththesenamesareprinted(Section7.3.3).
“Tare”: Thetarevalueusedinthecurrentweighingisprinted.
“Net”: Thevalueofthenetweightfromthecurrentweighingisprinted.
“Gross”: Thevalueofthegrossweightfromthecurrentweighingisprinted.
“Info Unit”: Theresultoftheweighing(thenetvalue)isalsoprintedusingtheselectedinformationunit(Section7.2.5).
“Signature”: Insertsadottedlinewheretheprintoutcanbesigned.
Factory setting: “Blankline”and“Net”areactive.
Thesampleshownhereillustratesaprintoutincludingalltheoptionsfortheindividualvalues,withtheexceptionofthe“Header",“BlankLine"andthe“IDs",sincethesehavealreadybeenillustratedinthesampleprintoutfortheheader.
“T” = Tarevalue“N” = Valueofthenetweight“G” = Valueofthegrossweight
Options for the footer on the printout
Inthissubmenuyoucanspecifytheinformationthatistobeprintedatthebottomoftheweighingprintout(aftertheresultsthemselves).Thefooterisprinted,ifthe“Footer”functionkeyspressed.
Thefollowingfooteroptionsareavailable:
“Blank Line”: Anemptylineisinserted.
“Appl. Name”: Thenameoftheapplicationisprinted(“Weighing”).
“Date/Time”: Thecurrentdateandtimeareprinted.
“Balance Type”: Themodelofthebalanceisreadfromtheinternalelectronics,andcannotbechangedbytheuser.
“SNR”: Theserialnumbersoftheterminalandoftheweighingplatformarereadfromthebalance’selectronics,andcannotbechanged.
“ID1”,“ID2”,“ID3”: The identifiers specified by means of the“ID” function key areprinted(Section7.3.3).
The“Weighing”application
58
7.2.8 Selections for manual printoutsThesettingsinthe“PrintKey”menuallowyoutospecifythebehaviorofthe«F»(printout)key.
“Signature”: Insertsadottedlinewheretheprintoutcanbesigned.
“Dash Line”: Insertsabrokenseparatingline.
“3 Blank Lines”: Prints three blank lines to complete the printout (paperadvance).
Factory setting: “Signature”and“3BlankLines”areactive.
“Stable”: Afterpressingthe«F»keytheprintoutwillnotbemadeuntiltheweighingresultisstable.
“Dynamic”: Afterpressingthe«F»keytheprintoutwillbemadeimmediately,regardlessofwhethertheweighingresultisstableornot.
“Off”: Aprintoutisnotmadewhenthe«F»keyispressed;thekeyisinactive.
Factory setting: “Stable”.
7.2.9 Formatting the output data
Youcanusethe“Transfer”functionkeytotransmitthestableweightvalueacrosstheinterface toahost computer (Section7.2.2). In thismenu, youcan specifyhowyouwanttheoutputvaluestobeformatted.Youmayneedtodothisifyouuseyourbalancetogetherwithotherinstruments,programs,orperipheraldevicesthatrequireaparticulardataformat.Youcanalsousethismenutospecifywhetherthedatashouldonlybeoutputtothehostoralsototheprinter.
Atthefactory,thedataoutputissettoastandard formatthatisessentiallythesameastheformatdisplayedontheterminal,butfollowedbyend-of-the-linecharactersthataredefinedforthehost(Section6.6).Negativeweightvalueshaveaminussignplacedbeforethevalue.Theoutputweightvalueisleft-justified.
Example(–12.8934g):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
– 1 2 . 8 9 3 4 g CR LF
Note:Ifyoureducetheresolutionofthedisplayedvalue,theweightvalueisalsotrasnmit-tedtothehostwithreducedresolution.
If,atthetimewhenthedataaretransmitted,thebalanceisdisplayinganunderloadoroverload,“UNDERLOAD”or“OVERLOAD”istransmittedinsteadoftheweightvalue.
The“Weighing”application
59
Ifyouwanttochangetheoutputformat,touchthebuttonnextto“Data output format”.
Activate“Customise”andthentouchthe“Define”button.
Thismenucontainssettingsforthefollowingdatafields:
– Netweightsymbol
– Weightvalue
– Weightunit
Intheoutputdata,thesefieldsareseparatedbyaspacecharacter.Thecompletedatarecordisterminatedwiththeend-of-linecharactersthatweredefinedforthehost(Sec-tion6.6).
Thesettingsfortheindividualdatafieldsareexplainedbelow.
Net weight symbol
Inthestandardoutputformat,netweightsarenotspeciallyidentified.Ifyouwantthenetweightstobeprecededbyan“N”,youmustactivatethisfunctionandalsospecifythefieldlength(1–10characters).Thenetsymbolisalignedleft-justifiedinthefield.Note:Ifthebalancehasnotbeentared,thenetsymbolisnottransmitted.Instead,spacecharacterscorrespondingtotheselectedfieldlengtharetransmitted.
Factory setting: Netweightsymboldeactivated. Fieldlength5characters.
Format of the weight value
Toformattheweightvalue,thefollowingoptionsareavailable:
“Field length”: Total length of the data field for the weight value includingsign, decimal point, and decimal places (1 – 20 characters). Note:Irrespectiveofyoursetting,enoughdecimalplaceswillal-waysbeoutputfortheweightvalueshownontheterminaltobecompletedlytransmitted.Theweightvalueisoutputright-justified.Factory setting:10.
The“Weighing”application
60
“No. of dec. digits”: Numberofdecimalplaces(0–6digits).Ifthesetnumberislessthanthenumberofdecimalplacesdisplayedontheterminal,thevaluewillberoundedtotheselectednumberofdecimalplacesbeforeitistransmitted.
Factory setting:Max.numberofdecimalplacesofthebalance.
“Sign”: Whensetto“Always”,theweightvalueisalwaysprecededbyaplusorminussign.Ifyouselect“Neg. values”,negativevalueswillbeprecededbyaminussign,butpositivevalueswillbetransmittedwithoutasign.Factory setting:“Neg.values”.
“Sign position”: Youcanuse thissetting tospecifywhether thesignshouldbeimmediatelyinfrontoftheweightvalue(rightjustified)orwithagapinbetween(leftjustified).
Factory setting:Rightjustified(immediatelyinfrontoftheweightvalue).
Field for the weight unit
Inthestandardoutputformat,eachweightvalueisoutputwiththeassociatedweightunit(correspondingtothecurrentdisplayunit).Inthismenuyoucanchoosewhetherweightunitsshouldbetransmittedwithorwithoutunitandalsospecifythefieldlengthfor theweightunit(1–5characters). Irrespectiveofyoursettingfor thefield length,enoughdecimalplaceswillbeoutputfortheweightvalueshownontheterminaltobecompletelytransmitted.Theweightunitisoutputleft-justified(separatedfromtheweightvaluebyaspacecharacter).
Factory setting: Outputoftheweightunitisactivated. Fieldlength3characters.
Data output on the printer
Whenyoupressthe“Transfer”functionkey,thedataarenormallyonlytrasnmittedtothehost.Ifyoualsowanttosendthedatatotheprinter,activatethesetting“Data transfer to printer”.Note:Thepreviouslydescribedsettingsforformattingthedatadonotaffecthowthedataareoutputontheprinter.Thisisentirelycontrolledbytheprotocolsettings(Section7.2.7).
Factory setting: Dataoutputontheprinterisdeactivated(“Off”).
The“Weighing”application
61
7.2.10 Define identifierInthismenuitispossibletoactivatethethreeidentifiersthatareavailableunderthe“ID”key(Section7.2.2)andtochangetheirnames.
SelecttheIDthatyouwishtoactivateordeactivate,orwhosenameyouwantchange.Note: DeactivatedIDs(“Off”)arenolongeravailableforselectionunderthe“ID”functionkey.
AwindowthenappearsinwhichyoucanactivatetheIDandchangethename.
Atthefactory,theIDsarepre-setwiththenames“ID1”,“ID2”and“ID3”.Youcanreplacethesewithyourownnames,suchas“Customer”for“ID1”,“Order”for“ID2”and“Batch”for“ID3”.
PresstheassociatedbuttoninordertochangethecurrentnameofanID.Analphanumericinputfieldwillappearwhereyoucantypethenewname(max.20characters).TheIDisthenavailable,withitsnewname,underthe“ID”functionkey.
Thenamesthathavebeenenteredalsoappearasthetitlesoftherelevantinformationfields(Section7.2.3),andarealsoincludedontheprintout(Section7.2.7).
NotesonworkingwithidentifiersmaybefoundinSection7.3.3.
Factory setting: “ID1”active(named“ID1”)
7.2.11 Specifications for handling barcode dataIfabarcodereaderisconnectedtoyourbalance,youcanspecifyhowitsdataisprocessedinthismenu.
Thefollowingsettingsmaybechosen:
"Off": Barcodedataisnotprocessed.Thissettingshouldbechosenifabarcodereaderisnotconnected.
"ID1","ID2","ID3": Thereceivedbarcodedataistreatedasidentifyingtext,andas-signedtothecorrespondingidentifier(Section7.3.3).Note:Theidentifiersthathavebeenspecifiedaredisplayed,ratherthan"ID1","ID2"or"ID3"(Section7.2.10).
“Host”: Thebarcodedataisnotprocessedinthebalance,butistransmitteddirectlytoaconnectedPC.IfnoPCisconnectedorthePCcannotreceivethedata,thedataisignored.
“Open Input”: Thebarcodedataiswrittentotheinputwindow(e.g.,itemcounterorID)thatiscurrentlyopenintheapplicationandtheinputwindowisthenclosedautomatically.Ifnoinputwindowisopen,thedataisignored.
Factory setting: "Off".
Note:Ifyouconnectabarcodereadertoyourbalance,youmustconfigurethesystemsettingsfortheinterfaceappropriately(Section6.6).
The“Weighing”application
62
7.2.12 Specifications for processing keyboard entriesIfanexternal keyboardisconnectedtoyourbalance,thismenucanbeusedtospecifyhowthedataistobeprocessed.
Thefollowingsettingsareavailable:
“Off”: Nokeyboardentriesareprocessed.Thissettingshouldbeusedifnokeyboardisconnected.
“Host”: Thekeyboardentriesarenotprocessed in thebalance,butaretransmitteddirectlytotheconnectedPC.IfnoPCisconnectedorthePCcannotreceivethedata,thedataisignored.
“Open Input”: Thekeyboardentriesarewrittentotheinputwindow(e.g.,itemcounteror ID) that iscurrentlyopen in theapplicationandthewindowisthenclosedautomatically.Ifnoinputwindowisopen,thedataisignored.
Factory setting: “OpenInput”.
Note:Ifyouconnectanexternalkeyboardtoyourbalance,configuretheinterfaceinthesystemsettingsaccordingly(Section6.6).
The“Weighing”application
63
7.3.3 Working with identifiersIdentifiersaretextsthatdescribeindividualweighingprocedures.Theymakeiteasytoassignweighedmaterialstoparticularordersorcustomers.Theidentifiersareincludedontheprintouts(oraretransmittedtoaconnectedcomputer).
Itisnecessarytoactivatethe“ID”functionkeyinordertobeabletoworkwithidentifiers(Section7.2.2).Thisfunctionkeyallowsyoutocalluptheavailableidentifiers,ofwhichtheremaybeuptothree.Note:IftheIDsaredeactivated,thefunctionkeyisshowningray,andpressingithasnoeffect.InthatcaseitisnecessaryfirstactivatetheIDs(Section7.2.10),beforeyoucanusetheidentifiers.
Thethreeidentifiersarenamed“ID1”,“ID2”and“ID3”atthefactory.Youcanreplacethesenameswithmoremeaningful titlesappropriatetoyourparticularapplication(Section7.2.10).Thenamesyouhavechosen(suchas“Customer”forID1,“Order”forID2and“Batch”forID3)arethenavailableunderthe“ID”functionkey.
7.3 Working with the “Weighing” applicationYouhavealreadyseeninSection4howasimpleweighingprocessiscarriedout.InthisSectionwewillshowyouhowthevariousfunctionsinthe“Weighing”applicationcanbeusedinpractice.
7.3.1 Changing the readability of the measured weightThebalanceisfactoryadjustedsothatthemeasuredweightisdisplayedwiththemaximumreadabilityofwhichtheparticularmodeliscapable(accordingto1d).Youcanchangethereadabilityofthemeasuredweightatanystageinyourwork.
Tochangethereadabilityofthemeasuredweight,thecorrespondingfunctionkeymustbeactivated(Section7.2.2).Thisfunctionkeyallowsyoutodisplaythereadabilitywithonlyonetenthoftheprecision,i.e.withonelessdecimalpoint.
7.3.2 Working with the item counterTheitemcounterinsertsanumberinfrontofeveryweightvalueonaprintout,andthisnumberisautomaticallyincreasedby1witheveryprintout.
It is necessary toactivate theassociated function key inorder toworkwith the itemcounter(Section7.2.2).
Whenyoupressthisfunctionkey,anumericalinputfieldappearsinwhichyoucanspecifytheinitialvaluefortheitemcounter.Thevalueispresetto0atthefactory,whichmeansthattheitemcounterisswitchedoff.Ifyouwanttostarttheitemcounter,enteraninitialvalueintherange1...999.
Everytimethe«F»keyisusedtoprintouttheresultsofaweighing,anitemcounterisaddedinfrontoftheweightvalues,andthiscounterisincreasedby1witheverynewprintout.Whenthecounterreachesthemaximumvalueof999,numberingstartsagainat1.
Note:The item counter also functions in connection with automatic printouts (Sec-tion7.2.4).
1 N 35.87 g
2 N 60.24 g
3 N 80.48 g
The“Weighing”application
64
Customer Mettler-Toledo GmbHOrder RF 414/01Batch 07 N 114.46 g
Werecommendthatthecorrespondinginformationfieldsarealsoactivatedwhenwork-ingwithidentifiers(Section7.2.3).Theinformationfieldshavethenamesthatyouhaveselectedforthethreeidentifiers.
Theexamplehereillustratesthebalance’sdisplayafteractivationoftheIDfunctionkeyandtheIDinformationfields.
TheworkingexamplehereisbasedonIDnamesasdefinedintheexampleabove.
Ifyouwanttocarryoutanorderforacustomerintheapplication,pressthe“ID”functionkey.Youcanthenselecttheidentifierforwhichyouwanttoenteratext(e.g.“Customer”).
Afieldappearswhereyoucanenterthecustomername(seediagramhere).Enterthename,andconfirmyourentrywith“OK”.
Afterpressingthe“ID”functionkeyandselectingthe“Order”ID,asimilarfieldappearswheretheordernamecanbeentered.Thebatchnamecanbeenteredafteryouhavepressedthe“ID”keyandselectedthe“Batch”ID.Eachidentifiercanbeupto20characterslong.
Whenalltheentriesarecomplete,youcanchecktheselectedidentifiersagainthroughtheinformationfieldsonthedisplay.
Alltheidentifyingtextsarestoreduntiltheyarereplacedbynewones.
Ifyouhavedefinedtheweighingprintoutinsuchawaythattheidentifiersareincludedin theprintout (Section7.2.7), thenboth the IDnames that youhave specified (e.g.“Customer”)andthetextthathasbeenentered(e.g.“Mettler-ToledoGmbH”)areprinted.The illustrationhereshowsaprintout including identifications inaccordancewiththeexampleabove.
The“Weighing”application
65
Pressingthisfunctionkeytriggersanadjustmentofthebalanceusingthebuilt-inadjust-mentweight.Youcandothisatanytime;youcanalsospecifyinthesystemsettingsthatthebalancerequestsadjustmentassoonasaspecifiedchangeinambienttemperaturehastakenplace(“CalInfo”setting,Section6.3.1).
Youcanhearmotorsmovingtheinternalweightintoplaceandremovingitagain.Thewindowshownhereisdisplayedduringtheadjustment.Theiconsareanimated,sothatyoucanvisuallyfollowtheadjustmentprocess.Youcanhalttheadjustmentprocessatanytimebypressingthe“Cancel”key.
Oneofthetwofollowingmessageswillappearwhentheprocessiscomplete:
The adjustment has been successfully completed.Press“OK”toreturntotheapplica-tion.
Ifaprinterisconnectedtothebalancetheadjustmentwillautomaticallyberecordedonahardcopyinaccordancewiththespecificationsthatyouhavemadeforprintingoutadjustmentsinthesystemsettings(Section6.3.4).YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection7.4.6.
Assoonasthespecifiedtemperaturecriterionissatisfied,thissmallstatusiconappearsinthetopright-handcornerofthedisplay.ThebalanceindicatesinthiswaythatitwantstocarryoutaFACTadjustment.Note:duringthefirst24hoursfollowingconnectiontothemains,FACTwillexecuteanumberoftimes,regardlessofwhatcriterionhasbeenselected.
Assoonasanyloadhasbeenremovedfromthebalance,andassumingthatakeyisnotpressedforaperiodof2minutes,theadjustmentautomaticallybegins.Awindowappearsinthecourseoftheadjustment,informingyouabouttheprogressofthecalibration.Ifyouareworkingwiththebalanceatthetimeoftheadjustment,youcanstopFACTwiththe“Cancel”button.Thebalancewillcarryouttheadjustmentatthenextopportunity.
Whentheadjustmenthasbeencompleted,thebalancereturnsautomaticallytotheap-plication.EveryFACTadjustmentisrecordedonaprintoutautomaticallyinaccordancewiththesettingsyouhavemade(Section6.3.1).Whatinformationisalsoincludedinadditiontotheadjustmentdatadependsonthesettingsyouhavemadeforadjustmentandtestprintouts(Section6.3.4).YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection7.4.6.
7.4.2 Adjustment with the internal weight
7.4 Adjust the balance and check the adjustmentYourbalanceisfactorysettofullyautomaticadjustment,FACT.FACTadjuststhebalanceautomaticallyassoonasthisismadenecessarybyachangeintheambienttemperature.Youcan,however,carryoutamanualadjustmentand/orcheckusingtheinternalweightoranexternalweightatanytime.
It isassumed in the followingdescriptions that theappropriate functionkeys foradjustmentand tests (Section7.2.2)havebeenactivated.
7.4.1 Fully automatic adjustment FACTFACTadjustsyourbalanceautomaticallyinaccordancewithaspecifiedtemperaturecriterion(Section6.3.1).
The“Weighing”application
66
7.4.3 Adjustment with an external weightPressingthisfunctionkeytriggersanadjustmentofthebalanceusinganexternaladjust-mentweight.Youcandothisatanytime;youcanalsospecifyinthesystemsettingsthatthebalancerequestsadjustmentassoonasaspecifiedchangeinambienttemperaturehastakenplace(“CalInfo”setting,Section6.3.1).Note:Dependingonregulationsthatvaryfromcountrytocountry,adjustmentwithanexternalweightmaynotbeavailableoncertifiedbalances.
Ifthereisaweightontheweighingpanatthetimeoftheadjustment,theflashingdisplay“0.00 g”promptsyoutoremoveit.Youwillthenbepromptedtoplacetheadjustmentweightonthepan.Therequiredadjustmentweightisindicatedattheloweredgeofthewindow.
Important: Makesurethatyouplacethecorrectweightonthepan,otherwisethead-justmentprocesswillbeabortedwithanerrormessage.Theadjustmentweightcanbespecifiedinthesystemsettings(Section6.3.2).
Note: Youcanhalttheadjustmentprocessatanytimewiththe“Cancel”key.
Theadjustmentprocesscontinuesautomaticallyoncetherequiredweighthasbeenplacedonthepan.Thewindowshownhereisdisplayedduringtheadjustment.
Attheendoftheadjustmentprocedure,youarepromptedtoliftofftheweight.Removetheadjustmentweightfromtheweighingpan.
An error occurred during the adjustment, and the process was aborted.Thismessagewillalsoappearwhenyouhavecancelledtheadjustmentyourself.Youcanrepeattheadjustmentprocedure,orcanreturntotheapplicationbypressing“OK”.
The“Weighing”application
67
7.4.4 Checking the adjustment with the internal weightYou can use the internal weight to check the correct adjustment of your balance bypressingthisfunctionkey.
Thecheckingprocedureissimilartothatusedforadjustmentwiththeinternalweight(Section7.4.2).
Successfulcompletionofthecheckingprocessisconfirmedwiththewindowshownhere.Ifaprinterisconnectedtothebalancethecheckwillautomaticallyberecordedonahardcopyinaccordancewiththespecificationsthatyouhavemadeforprintingoutchecksinthesystemsettings(Section6.3.4).YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection7.4.6.
Anappropriatemessageappears if thecheckingprocess isabortedasaresultofanerror.
7.4.5 Checking the adjustment with an external weight
Thebalanceconfirmssuccessfulcompletionoftheadjustment.Press“OK”toreturntotheapplication.
Ifaprinterisconnectedtothebalancetheadjustmentwillautomaticallyberecordedonahardcopyinaccordancewiththespecificationsthatyouhavemadeforprintingoutadjustmentsinthesystemsettings(Section6.3.4).YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection7.4.6.
Ifanerroroccursduringtheadjustmentprocess,acorrespondingerrormessageappearssimilartothatforadjustmentusingtheinternalweight(seeprevioussection).
Youcanuseandexternalweight tocheck thecorrectadjustmentofyourbalancebypressingthisfunctionkey.
Thecheckingprocedureissimilartothatusedforadjustmentwithanexternalweight.Aftercompletionofthecheckamessageappearssimilartothatforcheckingtheadjust-mentusingtheinternalweight. Ifaprinterisconnectedtothebalancethecheckwillautomaticallyberecordedonahardcopyinaccordancewiththespecificationsthatyouhavemadeforprintingoutchecksinthesystemsettings(Section6.3.4).YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection7.4.6.
The“Weighing”application
68
7.4.6 Adjustment and test print-outs (sample printouts)Printout of an internal or FACT adjustment Printout of an external adjustment
Note:AsignaturelineisnotprintedoutforaFACTadjustment.
Printout of an internal test Printout of an external test
- External adjustment --3.Sep 2004 18:39
METTLER TOLEDO
Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890SW WeighBridge 1.02SW Terminal 1.14Weight ID ECW-5000/1Certificate No. MT-414/A
Temperature 27.6 °C Nominal 5000.00 g
Adjustment done
Signature
........................------------------------
---- External test -----3.Sep 2004 18:40
METTLER TOLEDO
Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890SW WeighBridge 1.02SW Terminal 1.14Weight ID ETW-5000/RCertificate No. MT-412
Temperature 27.6 °C Nominal Weight 5000.00 g Actual 4999.96 g Diff -0.04 g
Test done
Signature
........................------------------------
----- Internal test ----3.Sep 2004 17:38
METTLER TOLEDO
Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890SW WeighBridge 1.02SW Terminal 1.14
Temperature 27.6 °C Nominal 100.0000 % Actual 99.9940 % Diff -0.0060 %
Test done
Signature
........................------------------------
- Internal adjustment --3.Sep 2004 17:37
METTLER TOLEDO
Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890SW WeighBridge 1.02SW Terminal 1.14
Temperature 27.6 °C
Adjustment done
Signature
........................------------------------
The“Statistics”application
69
I
J
8 The “Statistics” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
In thisSectionwedescribe the“Statistics”application.Youwill find informationhereaboutpractical aspectsofworkingwith thisapplicationandaboutitsspecificsettings.(InformationaboutthesystemsettingsthatarenotspecifictotheapplicationaretobefoundinSection6.)
8.1 Introduction to the “Statistics” application.The“Statistics”applicationbasicallyoffersthesamefacilitiesasthe“Weighing”application,butcontainsadditionalsettingsandfunctionsforthestatisticalrecordingandanalysisofweighingseries.
Manyoftheapplication-dependentsettingsareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application.Additionalfunctionkeysandinformationfieldsareneverthelessavailableforthestatistics.Onlythosesettingswillbeexplainedindetailinthefollowingdescriptionsthataredifferentfromthoseofthe“Weighing”application.
8.2 Select the application
8.3 Settings for the “Statistics” applicationAnumberofdifferentspecificsettingsareavailable for theStatistics,andthesecanbeusedtoadapt theapplication tosuityourneeds.
8.3.1 Overview
Theapplication-specificsettingscanbeaccessedviathe«J»key.Thefirstofatotaloffourmenupagesappearsafterpressingthiskey.
Unlessthe“Statistics”applicationisalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Presstheiconfortheapplicationintheselectionwindow.
Thefollowingdisplayappearswhentheapplicationhasbeenselected.Thespecialfunctionkeysandinformationfieldsforstatisticsareactivatedunderthefactorysettings.YoucanadaptthesettingstoyourownrequirementsasdescribedinthefollowingSections.
Notes: If theinformationfieldsarenotdisplayedonyourbalance,pressthe“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeofthedisplayoftheweight,andtherebyprovidespacefortheinformationfieldstobeshown.Thetwofunctionkeysfor“Result”and“CLResult”appearingraybecauseatthisstagethestatisticalfunctionsdonotcontainanyvalues.
The“Statistics”application
70
Apartfromasmallnumberofexceptions,thesettingsavailableforthe“Statistics”applicationareidenticalwiththoseforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2).Onlydifferencesinthesettingsaredescribedbelow.Theseconcernthefollowingmenus:
“Function Keys”:Additional functionkeysareavailable fortheStatistics.
“Info Field”:AdditionalinformationfieldsareavailablefortheStatistics.
“Protocol”:AdditionalprintoutinformationisavailablefortheStatistics.
“Additive Mode”:In this menu, which is only available inthe “Statistics” menu, you can activatethe additive mode (series weighing withautomatictaring).
InthefollowingSectionswewillpresentthespecificsettingsforthe“Statistics”applicationindetail.
8.3.2 Special function keys for statistical purposesThefollowingsettingsareavailableinthefunctionkeymenuforusewiththestatisticssystem:
“M+”: Thisfunctionkeypassesthecurrentstableweighttothestatisticssystem(Section8.4.1).
“Result”: Thisfunctionkeyopensthestatisticswindow(Section8.4.1).
“CL Result”: Thisfunctionkeydeletesthestatisticsfromaseriesofweighings(Section8.4.1).
“CL last”: This functionkeyclears themost recently savedmeasurement(Section8.4.1).
“Nominal”: Youspecifythedesiredtargetweightwiththisfunctionkey(Section8.4.2).Thetargetvalueisalsousedasareferenceforthetolerances(describedbelow).
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Youcanspecifywiththesefunctionkeystheprecision(tolerances)with which you want the weighing to be carried out (Section8.4.2).
“Max n”: Youspecifythemaximumnumberofsamplesinaserieswiththisfunctionkey(Section8.4.1).
All the remaining function keys correspond to those for the“Weighing” application(Section7.2.2).
Factory setting: “M+”, “Result” , “CL Result” and “Display” are active (in thatsequence).
The“Statistics”application
71
8.3.3 Special statistical information fieldsThefollowingsettingsareavailableonthefirsttwopagesoftheinformationfieldsmenuforthedisplay of statistical values:
“n”: Numberofsamplesweighed.
“x”: Meanweightofallsamples.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standarddeviationasanabsoluteorasapercentagefigure.
“Sum”: Summedweightofalltheindividualweighings.
“Min”and“Max”: Smallest and largest weights found in the current series ofweighings.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenthesmallestandlargestmeasuredweights.
“Nominal”: Indicates the target value that has been entered through thefunctionkeywiththesamename.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: These information fieldsdisplay the tolerances that havebeenenteredthroughthefunctionkeyswiththesamenames.
Alltheinformationfieldskeyscorrespondtothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: “n”,“x”and“s”areactivated(inthissequence).
Additionalsettingsforstatistics,describedbelow,areavailableinthethreesubmenusinwhichyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheprintoutheader,forprintingtheindividualvalues,andfortheresult.
Note:Theremainingavailableprintoutinformationcorrespondstothatforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.7),andisnotdescribedhere.
The printout header
Additionalsettingsforstatisticsareavailableonthesecondpageofthissubmenu:
“Max n”: Printsthespecifiedmaximumnumberofsamplesintheseries.
“Nominal”: Printsthespecifiedtargetweight.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Thespecifiedtolerancesareprinted.
Factory setting: “Appl.Name"(“Statistics” isprinted); thusnospecificstatisticalinformationisactivated.
Theheader isautomaticallyprintedwhen the“M+” key ispressedduringa seriesofweighingsinordertopassthefirstmeasuredweighttothestatisticalsystem.Theheadercanalsobeprintedseparatelybypressingthe“Header”functionkey.
8.3.4 Special printout information for statistical purposes
The“Statistics”application
72
Printing the individual values
Thesameadditionalsettingsareavailableinthisissubmenuasareprovidedfortheheader:(“Maxn”,“Nominal”,“+Tol”and“–Tol”).
Factory setting: “Net”(thenetweightofthecurrentweighing).Nospecificstatisticalinformationisactivated.
Anindividualvalueisautomaticallyprintedwhenthe“M+”functionkeyispressedduringaseriesofweighings.Anindividualvaluecan,however,alsobeenprintedoutseparatelybypressingthe«F»functionkey.
Printing the result
Youspecifytheadditionalstatisticalinformationthatistobeincludedintheresultprintoutinthissubmenu:
“Max n”: Thespecifiedmaximumnumberofsamplesintheseries.
“Nominal”: Thespecifiedtargetweight.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Thespecifiedtolerances.
“n”: Numberofsamplesweighed.
“x”: Meanweightofallsamples.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standarddeviationasanabsoluteorasapercentagefigure. Note:Thesetwovaluesareonlyprintedifthestatisticalsystem
containsatleastthreevalues;otherwisehorizontalbarsaredis-playedinsteadofthevalues.
“Min”and“Max”: Smallest and largest weights found in the current series ofweighings.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenthesmallestandlargestmeasuredweights.
“Sum”: Summedweightofallthesavedindividualweighings.
Factory setting: “n”,“x”,“s”,“s.rel”,“Min”,“Max”,“Diff”and“Sum”.The“Signature”and“3BlankLines”settingsarealsoactive(Section7.2.7).
Theseresultsareprintedwhenthe«F»keyispressedwhilethestatisticswindowisopen.Ifaspecificnumberofsampleshasbeendefinedforaseriesofweighings(“Maxn”)theresultsareprintedautomaticallyassoonasthevalueoftheweightofthelastsamplehasbeenpassedtothestatisticssystemusingthe“M+”key.
Note:“Maxn”,“Nominalvalue”,“+Tol"and“–Tol”areincludedontheprintoutofresults,butarenotdisplayedinthestatisticswindow.
Youwillfindasample printoutwithstatisticalvaluesinSection8.4.3.
The“Statistics”application
73
8.3.5 Activate additive modeInthismenu,whichisonlyavailableinthe“Statistics”application,youcanswitchtheadditivemodeonoroff.Inweighingseriesmadewiththeadditivemodeactiveyoudonothavetoremovethesamplesfromtheweighingpan.
“Off": Additivemodeisswitchedoff.
“On": Additivemodeisswitchedon.Theresultofweighingasampleispassedtothestatisticalsystembypressingthe“M+”functionkey,afterwhichthebalanceisautomaticallytared.Thenextsamplecanbeweighedwithouthavingtoremovetheprevioussamplesfromtheweighingpan.
Factory setting: “Off”.
8.4 Working with the “Statistics” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“Statistics”application.Itisofcoursepossibletospecifyatare,modifythereadabilityofthemeasuredweight,useidentifiersandsoforth.Youwillalreadybefamiliarwiththesefacilitiesfromthe“Weighing”application(Section7.3),andtheywillthereforenotbeexplainedagainhere.
8.4.1 Statistical recording of series of weighings
Default settings
Atleastthethreefunctionkeysshownheremustbeactivatedforyoutobeabletousethestatistics(Section8.3.2).
It isalso recommended that the two functionkeysoppositeareactivated.Theyallowincorrectvaluestobedeleted(“CLLast”)andthenumberofsamplesthatshouldbeincludedinaseriesofmeasurementstobespecified(“Maxn”).
Aprintershouldbeconnectedtoyourbalancetomakebestuseofthestatisticalfunctions.Ifthisisnotthecase,werecommendthatyouactivatethethreeinformationfieldsthatwillbemostimportantforyourapplication(e.g.“n”,“x”and“Sum”.SeeSection8.3.3).
Note:Ifyoustartaweighingserieswitha“CustomUnit”(Section7.2.6),theweightunitcanonlybechangedafteryouhavecompletedthemeasurementseries.
Operating sequence
Ifthenumberofsamplesthatistobeweighedforaseriesisalreadyspecified,youcanpressthe“Max n”functionkeyandenterthenumberofsamples(max.999).Theseriesisautomaticallycompletedafterthelastsamplehasbeenweighed,thestatisticalwindowisopened,andtheresultsareprintedout.Notes:Thisfunctionkeyisonlyactiveaslongasthestatisticalsystemdoesnotcontainanymeasurements.Theseriesisunlimitedifyouenterthevalue0(zero)for“Max n”,andyoucanweighupto999samples.
Ifyouareworkingwithaweighingcontainer,placethisonthebalanceandpressthe«H»totarethebalance.
The“Statistics”application
74
Placethefirstsampleonthebalance,andpressthe“M+”functionkeytopasstheweighttothestatisticalsystem.Assoonasthevalueoftheweightisstable(horizontalbarsdisap-pearinthedisplay)thevalueispassedtothestatisticalsystem.Theheaderisprintedouttogetherwiththeresult(thesinglevalue)ofthecurrentweighing(Section8.3.4).
Removethefirstsample.Note:IfyouhaveactivatedAdditiveMode(Section8.3.5)youcanleavethesampleontheweighingpan,becausethebalancewillautomaticallybetaredafterthe“M+”functionkeyhasbeenpressed.
Placetheothersamplesonthebalanceinturn.Confirmeachweighingwiththe“M+”functionkey,liftthesampleoffandtarethebalance(notnecessaryifadditivemodewasactive).Eachtime“M+”ispressedtheindividualvaluethathasbeenfoundisautomati-callyprinted.
Notes:– Anerrormessageappearsifyoupressthe“M+”keywithouttheweighthavingchanged.
Thispreventsthesamesamplefrombeingmeasuredtwice.
– Ifyouhaveaccidentallyplacedanincorrectweightonthebalanceandsavedtheresultoftheweighingyoucandeletethemostrecentvaluewiththe“CL Last”functionkey(onlyavailablewhenvalueshavebeensaved,otherwisethekeyappearsgrayandcannotbeactivated).Onceavaluehasbeendeletedthekeybecomesinactive,andwillonlyworkagainafterthenextvaluehasbeenpassedtothestatisticalsystem.
Whenallsampleshavebeenweighed,pressthe“Result”functionkey(onlyavailablewhenvalueshavebeensaved;otherwisethekeyappearsgrayanditcannotbeactivated).Thistemporarilyhaltsthemeasurementprocessandopensthatstatisticalwindow.(Youcan,however,continuetheseriesatanytime).Note:Ifthe“Max n”functionkeywasusedbeforeweighingstartedtospecifythenumberofsamples,thenwhenthelastsamplehasbeenweighedthestatisticalwindowwillopenautomatically,withthecommentthatthemaximumnumberofsampleshasbeenreached.
Thestatisticalwindowcontainstheresultof theseriesofweighings.(Theinformationthatyouselectedforprintingtheresultisdisplayed,seeSection8.3.4).PleasenotetheinformationinSection8.4.3regardingunits,readabilityandtheprecisionofthedisplayedvalues.
Thearrowkeysallowyoutoswitchbetweentheindividualscreendisplays.Youcanprinttheresultbypressingthe«F»key.
YouwillfindacompletesampleprintoutwithstatisticalvaluesinSection8.4.3.
Ifyouaresurethatyouwanttocompletethemeasuringprocedureandclearthememoryforafurtherseries,pressthe“CL Result”functionkey.(Forsecurityreasonsyouwillbepromptedtoprovideconfirmationbeforethestatisticsareactuallydeleted.)Note:Ifthebuttonappearsgrayitisbecausethestatisticalsystemdoesnotcontainanyvalues.
The“Statistics”application
75
8.4.2 Additive weighing to a target valueThe“Statistics”applicationprovidesyouwithadditionalfunctionsthatmakeiteasiertoperformadditiveweighinguptoaspecifiedtargetvalue.Whenusingthestatistics,youcanapplythesefunctionsbothtoindividualweighingsandtoseriesweighings.
Default settings
Thefunctionkeysshownheremustbeactivatedsothatyoucanenteratargetvalueandtheassociatedtolerances(Section8.3.2).Ifdesired,youcanalsoactivatetheinforma-tionfieldswiththesamenamessothatthevaluesthathavebeenspecifiedarevisibleonthedisplay(Section8.3.3).
Operating sequence
Note:Ifthestatisticalsystemalreadycontainsvalues,thefunctionkeyswithwhichthetargetvalueandthetolerancescanbeenteredarenotactive.Inthatcaseyoumustclearthestatisticsusingthe“CL Result”functionkeybeforeyoucanspecifythetargetvalueandthetolerances.
Pressthe“Nominal”functionkeytoenterthedesiredtargetweight.Typeinthedesiredtargetvalue.(Ifthereisalreadyaweightonthebalancethatmatchesthetargetweight,youcanadopt thisdirectlybypressing thebuttonwith thebalance icon).Check theweighingunit,whichisdisplayedtotherightofthetargetvalue.Pressingtheweighingunitwillcausealistoftheavailableunitstoappear.Note:Theunitsarenotautomaticallyconverted;ifyouhaveenteredavalueinoneunit,thisvalueisretainedevenwhenyouchangetheweighingunit.Press“OK”afteryouhaveenteredthevaluetoactivatethetargetweight.
Youcanusethetwo“+Tol”and“–Tol”functionkeystospecifytheprecisiontobeusedfortheweighing.Theinputwindowisthesameasthatforthetargetvalue.Bothtolerancesaresetatthefactoryto2.5%.
Aftertheappropriatevaluehasbeenentered,press“OK”toactivatethetolerance.
Note:Sampleswhosemeasurementisoutsidethetolerancearespeciallymarkedwhentheindividualvaluesareprintedout(with“>T”or“<T”respectively).
Assoonasyouhaveentered the targetvalueandthe tolerances thegraphicalfillingguide(“SmartTrac”)appears.Thisdisplaystolerancemarksthatmakeiteasierforyoutoweighuptothetargetvalue:Youcanaddroughlytherightamountofmaterialuntilthelowertolerancevaluehasbeenreached,andthen,ifnecessary,makecarefuladditionstoreachthetargetvalue.
The“Statistics”application
76
------ Statistics ------3.Sep 2004 12:55Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890Nominal 12.04 g +Tol 2.50 % -Tol 2.50 % n 4 x 11.889 g s 0.331 g s.rel 2.78 % Min 11.39 g Max 12.08 g Diff 0.69 g Sum 47.55 g
Signature
........................
8.4.3 Sample printout with statistical values
Thediagramoppositeshowsasampleprintoutwithstatisticalvalues.Thevaluesthatareprintedintheheader,asindividualvalues,andastheresultdependontheindividualprintoutsettingsthatyouhavemade(Section8.3.4).
Onlythestatisticalinformationintheillustratedsampleprintoutisexplainedbelow.YouwillfindnotesontheotherprintoutinformationinSection7.2.7:
“Nominal”: Thespecifiedtargetweight.
“+Tol”: Thespecifiedpositivetolerance.
“–Tol”: Thespecifiednegativetolerance.
“n”: Thenumberofsamplesweighed.
“x”: Meanweightofallsamples.Thevalue isprinted in thecurrentdisplayunit.Thereadabilityoftheprintedvaluesis10timesgreaterthanthoseofthemeasurementswiththehighestreadabilitywithintheseriesofmeasurements.
“s”: Thestandarddeviationwithintheseries.Thevalueisprintedinthecurrentdisplayunit.Thereadabilityoftheprintedvaluesis10timesgreaterthanthoseofthemeasurementswiththehighestreadabilitywithintheseriesofmeasurements.
“s.rel”: Relativestandarddeviationwithintheseries(inpercent).Thevalueisalwaysprintedwith2decimalfigures.
“Min”: Thelowestweightfoundinthecurrentseriesofmeasurements.Thenumberofdecimalpointsandtheunitmatchthoseofthevaluesthatwerevisiblewhenthemeasurementwastransferredtotheresult.
“Max”: Thelargestweightfoundinthecurrentseriesofmeasurements.Thenumberofdecimalpointsandtheunitmatchthoseofthevaluesthatwerevisiblewhenthemeasurementwastransferredtotheresult.
“Diff”: Thedifferencebetweenthesmallestandthelargestweightsfoundinthecurrentseriesofmeasurements.Thevalueisprintedinthecurrentdisplayunit.Thenumberofdecimalpointsintheprintedvaluematchesthoseofwhicheverofthesmallestorlargestweighthasthehighestreadability.
“Sum”: Thesumofalltheindividualweightsthathavebeenstored.Thevalueisprintedinthecurrentdisplayunit.Thenumberofdecimalfiguresmatchesthatofwhichevervalueintheseriesofmeasurementshasthehighestreadability.
Important information on interpreting the printed results
Thevaluesfor“x”and“s”aretheresultsofcalculations,andaredisplayedwithahigherreadabilitythanthatoftheindividualmeasurements.Iftheseriesofmeasurementsissmall(lessthanabout10measurements),oriftheserieshassmallvariations,thesignificanceofthelastdecimalfigurecannotbeguaranteed.
The“Statistics”application
77
∑=
=n
iix
nx
1
1
( )2
1
1 ∑ −−
= xxn
s i
= =
−
−= ∑ ∑
n
i
n
iii x
nx
ns
1
2
1
2 11
1
( )= =
∆−∆
−= ∑ ∑
n
i
n
iii x
nx
ns
1
2
1
2 11
1
∑=
∆+=n
iix
nXx
10
1
100x
ssrel =
8.4.4 Formulas used for calculating statistical valuesCalculating the mean value and standard deviation
Terminoloy
ix :=Individualmeasurementvaluesofameasurementseriesofnmeasurementvalues ni ...1=x :=Meanvalueandsstandarddeviationofthesemeasurementvalues
Theformulaforcalculatingthemeanvalueis: (1)
Theusualformulaforcalculatingstandarddeviation,asseenintheliteratures
(2)
isnotsuitablefornumericalcalculation,sincethevariance(individualvalue-meanvalue)canresultindeletioninmeasurementseriesthathaveverysmalldeviations.Moreover,whenthisformulaisused,eachindividualmeasurementvaluemustbestoredbeforethestandarddeviationcanbedeterminedattheend.
Thefollowingformulaismathematicallyequivalentbutsignificantlymorestablenumerically.Itcanbederivedfrom(1)and(2)throughappropriaterecasting.
Tousethisformulaforcalculatingthemeanvalueandthestandarddeviation,youjustneedtostoren,∑ ix and2∑ ix .
Standard deviationNumericalstabilitycanbeimprovedevenmorebyscalingthemeasurementvalue:With 0: Xxx ii −=∆ ,where 0X (dependingontheapplication)iseitherthefirstmeasurementvalueofameasurementseriesorthenominalvalueofameasurementseries,theresultis:
Mean valueThemeanvalueisthencalculatedasfollows:
Relative standard deviationTherelativestandarddeviationiscalculatedbymeansofthefollowingformula:
percent
Number of digits in the resultsMeanvalueandstandarddeviationarealwaysexpressedanddisplayedtoonemoredecimalplacethanthecorrespondingindividualmeasurementvalues.Wheninterpretingtheresults,keepinmindthattheadditionaldecimalplaceisnotmeaningfulwhenitcomestosmallmeasurementseries(lessthanapprox.10measurementvalues).Thesameisalsotrueofpercentages(suchasthoseusedinexpressingrelativestandarddeviations),whicharealwaysshowntotwodecimalplaces(forexample,13.45percent).Here,too,thesignificanceofthedecimalplacesdependsonthesizeofthebackgrounddata.
The“Formulation”application
78
I
J
9 The “Formulation” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
InthisSectionwedescribethe“Formulation”application.Youwillfindinformationhereaboutpracticalaspectsofworkingwiththisapplicationandaboutitsspecificsettings.(InformationaboutthesystemsettingsthatarenotspecifictotheapplicationaretobefoundinSection6.)
9.1 Introduction to the “Formulation” application The“Formulation”applicationallowsyoutoweighinthecomponentsofaFormulationuptoaspecifictargetweight.Thevaluesofeachcomponent(targetweight,tolerances,differencefromtargetweight,etc.)canbestored,andafterallthecomponentshavebeenweighedinaFormulationrecordcanbeprintedout.
Manyoftheapplication-dependentsettingsareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application.Additionalfunctionkeys,informationfieldsandprintoutinformationare,however,availableforFormulationpurposes.Onlythosesettingswillbeexplainedindetailinthefollowingdescriptionsthataredifferentfromthoseofthe“Weighing”application.
9.2 Select the applicationUnlessthe“Formulation”applicationisalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Presstheiconfortheapplicationintheselectionwindow.
Thedisplayoppositeappearswhentheapplicationhasbeenselected.Thespecialfunc-tionkeysandinformationfieldsforFormulationareactivatedunderthefactorysettings.Youcanadapttheseandothersettingstoyourownrequirements,asdescribedinthefollowingSections.
Notes: If theinformationfieldsarenotdisplayedonyourbalance,pressthe“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeofthedisplayoftheweight,andtherebyprovidespacefortheinformationfieldstobeshown.Thetwofunctionkeysfor“Result”and“CLResult”aredisplayedingray,sincenoFormula-tionhasyetbeencarriedout.
9.3 Settings for the “Formulation” applicationAnumberofdifferent specificsettingsareavailable forFormulation,and thesecanbeused toadapt theapplication tosuit yourneeds.
9.3.1 Overview
Theapplication-specificsettingscanbeaccessedviathe«J»key.Thefirstofatotalofthreemenupagesappearsafterpressingthiskey.
The“Formulation”application
79
Apartfromasmallnumberofexceptions,thesettingsavailableforthe“Formulation”applicationareidenticalwiththoseforthe“Weigh-ing”application(Section7.2).Onlydifferencesinthesettingsaredescribedbelow.Theseconcernthefollowingmenus:
“Function Keys”:Additional functionkeysareavailable fortheFormulation.
“Info Field”:AdditionalinformationfieldsareavailableforFormulation.
“Protocol”:Additionalinformationisavailableforprint-ingoutinassociationwithFormulation.
“Identification”:This menu corresponds to that of the"Weighing" application, but special IDnameshavebeenspecifiedatthefactoryforFormulation.
InthefollowingSectionswewillpresentthespecificsettingsforthe“Formulation”applicationindetail.
9.3.2 Special function keys for formulationThefollowingsettingsareavailableinthefunctionkeymenuforFormulation:
“M+”: Savesthenetweightoftheweighedcomponents.
“Result”: OpensthewindowwiththeresultsoftheFormulationprocess.
“CL Result”: ClearstheresultsofaFormulation.
“ID”: Thisfunctionkeyallowsidentifiers(descriptivetexts)tobeassignedtothecomponents,andthesearealsoreproducedontheprintoutandintheinformationfield.
“Abs/Diff”: Switchesthedisplayoftheweighedbetweenthequantityweighedinforacomponent(“Abs”=absolute)andthequantitythatstillhastobeweighedintoreachthetargetweight(“Diff”=difference).
“Nominal”: Youcanspecifythedesiredtargetweightforthecurrentcomponentwiththisfunctionkey.
“+Tol” and“–Tol”: Youcanspecifytheaccuracywithwhichthecomponentistobeweighedinwiththesefunctionkeys.
Allthefunctionkeysthatarenotlistedherecorrespondtothoseforthe“Weighing”ap-plication(Section7.2.2).
Factory setting: “M+”,“Result”,“CLResult”,“ID”and“Display”areactive(inthatsequence).
The“Formulation”application
80
9.3.3 Special information fields for formulationThefollowingsettingsareavailableonthetwopagesoftheinformationfieldsmenuforFormulation:
“Comp. weight”: Currentnetweightofacomponent.
“Nominal”: Indicatesthetargetvalueforthecurrentcomponentthathasbeenenteredthroughthefunctionkeywiththesamename.
“Net Tot.”: Displaysthetotalnetweightofallthecomponentsthathavebeenweighedin.
“+Tol” and“–Tol”: These information fieldsdisplay the tolerances that havebeenenteredthroughthefunctionkeyswiththesamenames.
“Comp. Counter ”: Displaysthecurrentstateofthecomponentcounter(thesucces-sivenumberofthecurrentcomponent).
“....... ID”: Thesedisplaytheidentifiersthathavebeenenteredbymeansofthe“ID”functionkey(Section9.3.5).Note:Theoppositeexampleshowsthefactorysettingsfortheidentifiers,i.e.“RecipeID”(ID1),“Comp.ID”(ID2)and“LotID”(ID3).
Allotherinformationfieldscorrespondtothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: “Nominal”and“Comp.ID”areactive(inthatsequence).
9.3.4 Special printout information for formulation
Youcanmakethesettingsfortheprintout,dividedintoheader,individualvaluesandresult,inthethreesubmenus.Additionalsettings,describedbelow,areavailableforFormulation.
Note: Theremainingavailableprintoutinformationcorrespondstothatforthe“Weighing”application(Section6.2.7),andisnotdescribedhere.
The printout header
Incontrasttothe“Weighing”application,thissubmenuonlycontainsoneidentifier,notthree:
“Recipe ID”: Theformulaidentifierenteredbymeansofthe“ID”functionkeyisprinted.
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(theapplication’sidentifier)isactivated.
Theheaderisautomaticallyprintedwhenthe“M+”functionkeyispressedinordertosavetheweightofthefirstcomponent.
The“Formulation”application
81
Printing the individual values
ThefollowingspecialsettingsareavailabletoyouinthissubmenuforFormulation:
“....... ID”: Printtheidentifiersthathavebeenenteredbymeansofthe“ID”functionkey(Section9.3.5).Note:Theoppositeexampleshowsthefactorysettingsfortheidentifiers,i.e.“RecipeID”(ID1),“Comp.ID”(ID2)and“LotID”(ID3).
“Comp. Counter”: Printsthecurrentstateofthecomponentcounter(numberofthecurrentcomponentintheseries).
“Nominal”: Printsthetargetvalueforthecurrentcomponentthathasbeenenteredthroughthefunctionkeywiththesamename.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: The tolerancesenteredbymeansof the functionkeyswith thesamenamesareprinted.
“Net %”: Theweightofthecurrentcomponentisprintedasa%ofthetargetweight.
“Diff.”: Thedifferencebetweentheactualandtargetweightofthecurrentcomponentisprinted.
“Diff. %”: The difference between the actual weight of the currentcomponentanditstargetweightisprintedasapercentage.
Factory setting: “Comp.ID”(“ID2”)and“Net”(thenetweightofthecurrentcom-ponent).
Anindividualvalueisautomaticallyprintedwhenthe“M+”functionkeyispressedduringFormulation.Anindividualvaluecan,however,alsobeprintedoutseparatelybypressingthe«F»functionkey.
Printing the result
YoucanspecifytheadditionalinformationregardingtheFormulationthatistobeincludedintheresultprintoutinthissubmenu:
“Recipe ID”: Theformulaidentifierenteredbymeansofthe“ID”keyisprinted(“RecipeID”intheoppositeexampleistheidentifier’snamesetatthefactory).
“Nominal Tot”: Thetotaloftheenterednominalweightsofallcomponentsthathavebeenweighedinisnowprinted.
“Comp. counter”: Printsthecurrentstateofthecomponentcounter(thenumberofthemostrecentlyweighedcomponent).
“Net Tot.”: Printsthetotalnetweightofallthecomponentsthathavebeenweighedin.
Factory setting: “RecipeID”(“ID1”),“NetTot.”,“Signature”and“3BlankLines”.
Theseresultsareprintedwhenthe«F»keyispressedwhiletheresultwindowisopen.
Youwillfindasample printout for FormulationinSection9.4.3.
The“Formulation”application
82
9.3.5 Special identifiers for formulationInthismenuyouspecifythenamesforthethreeidentifiersthatareavailableduringFormulationunderthe“ID”functionkey.
Thefactorysettingforthesethreeidentifiershavethefollowingnames:
“ID1” “RecipeID”“ID2” “Komp.ID”“ID3” “LotID”
Youcandeactivateindividualidentifiers,orcanreplacetheirnameswithyourowntext(max.20characters).
Thenamesthathavebeenenteredalsoappearasthetitlesoftherelevantinformationfields(Section9.3.3),andareincludedontheprintout(Section9.3.4).
Factory setting: “ID1”and“ID2”active,seeabovefornames
9.4 Working with the “Formulation” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“Formulation”applicationandtoprinttheresults.
9.4.1 Default settings
Atleastthethreefunctionkeys“M+”,“Result”and“CL Result”mustbeactiveforFor-mulation(Section9.3.2).
The“ID”functionkeyshouldalsobeactive,sothatyoucanassignthenamesyouwanttoyourformulasandcomponents.
Ifyouwanttoweighyourcomponentstowithinaparticulartoleranceuptoatargetweight,youmustalsoactivatethe“Nominal”,“+Tol”and“–Tol”functionkeys.
Wealsorecommendthatthe“Abs/Diff”functionkeyisactivated,sothatyoucanswitchthedisplayatany timebetween thequantityofacomponent thathasalreadybeenweighedinandthequantitythatstillhastobeadded.
AprintershouldbeconnectedtoyourbalancetoprintoutFormulations. If this isnotthecase,werecommendthatyouactivatethethreeinformationfieldsthatwillbemostimportantforyourFormulationapplication(e.g.“Nominal”,“ID1”and“ID2”,seeSection9.3.3).
The“Formulation”application
83
9.4.2 Operating sequenceIfyouareworkingwithaweighingcontainer,placethisonthebalanceandpressthe«H»,totarethebalance.
Press the“ID” functionkeyandenter thedesirednames(for the formula, for thefirstcomponentand,ifID3isactive,alsoforthecurrentlot).
Ifyouwanttoweighuptoatargetvalue,pressthe“Nominal”functionkey,andspecifythetargetweightforthefirstcomponent.
Note:Ifyouhavechangedthedisplaytoshowtheremainingamount(difference)beforeenteringthetargetweightusingthe“Abs/Diff”functionkey,thetargetweightwillappearonthedisplaywithanegativearithmeticsign(thedifferencebetweentheweightandzero).
Ifyouareusingtolerances,entertheappropriatevaluesusingthe“+Tol”and“–Tol”func-tionkeys.(Samplesthatlieoutsidethetolerancebandaremarkedwith“>T”or“<T”ontheprintoutofindividualvalues.)
Assoonasyouhaveenteredthetargetweightandthetolerancesforthefirstcomponent,thegraphicalfillingguide(“SmartTrac”)appears.Thisdisplaystolerancemarksthatmakeiteasierforyoutoweighuptothetargetvalue.
Weighinthefirstcomponent.
Note:Youcanswitchthedisplayoftheweightatanytimebetweenthequantityofthecomponentsthathasalreadybeenweighedinandtheremainingquantitythatstillhastobeaddedwiththe“Abs/Diff”functionkey.
Whenthetargetweighthasbeenreached,ortheweightiswithinthetoleranceband,pressthe“M+”functionkeytosavethevalue.Theheaderisprintedouttogetherwiththesinglevalueofthecurrentcomponent(Section9.3.4).
Thebalanceisnowreadyforthesecond componenttobeweighedin.Ifyouwanttoweighthesecondcomponentintothesamecontainer,itisnotnecessarytotarethebalance.Ifyouwishtoweighthesecondcomponentintoanewweighingcontainer,removetheweighingcontainerwiththefirstcomponentandset the balance to zero(«G»key).Nowputthenewcontainerinplace,andtarethebalance.
Specifythenames(IDs)andvalues(targetvalue,tolerances)forthesecondcomponent,weighthecomponentin,andsavetheresultwiththe“M+”functionkey.
Weighintheothercomponentsasdescribedabove.Eachtime“M+”ispressedtheindividualmeasuredvalueisprintedinaccordancewithyourspecifications(Section9.3.4).
Whenallthecomponentsintheformulahavebeenweighed,pressthe“Result”functionkey(onlyavailablewhenvalueshavebeensaved;otherwisethekeyappearsgrayanditcannotbeactivated).
The“Formulation”application
84
------ Formulation -----29.Jul 2004 14:52Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890Terminal SNR: 1234567890Recipe ID EraphteneComp. ID RSF-8Lot ID 04AComp 1 Nominal 11.02 g +Tol 0.28 g -Tol 0.28 g Tare 1.58 g 1 N 10.95 g 1 G 12.53 g 1 N 99.3 % 1 Diff -0.07 g 1 Diff -0.7 %Comp. ID AIL-8ALot ID 04AComp 2 Nominal 5.22 g +Tol 0.13 g -Tol 0.13 g Tare 1.59 g 2 N 5.31 g 2 G 17.85 g 2 N 101.8 % 2 Diff 0.09 g 2 Diff 1.8 %
NominalTot 16.24 g Net Tot 16.26 g
Signature
........................
Afteryouhavepressedthe“Result”functionkey,threeresultsaredisplayed:“NominalTot.”,“Comp.Counter”and“NetTot.”.Theywill,however, onlybedisplayedifyouhaveselectedthesesettings(Printingtheresults,Section9.3.4).
Youcanprintthecompleteresultbypressingthe«F»key.
YouwillfindacompletesampleprintoutinSection9.4.3.
IfyouaresurethatyouwanttocompletetheFormulationprocedureandclearthememoryforafurtherFormulation,pressthe“CL Result”functionkey.(Forsecurityreasonsyouwillbepromptedtoprovideconfirmationbeforethememoryisactuallycleared.)
9.4.3 Sample printout for a formulation
AsampleprintoutfromaFormulationisillustratedhere.Thevaluesthatareprintedintheheader,asindividualvalues,andastheresultdependontheindividualprintoutsettingsthatyouhavemade(Section9.3.4).
OnlytheinformationthatisspecifictoFormulationisexplainedbelow.YouwillfindnotesontheotherprintoutinformationinSection7.2.7:
“Recipe ID”: Nameoftheformulathathasbeenspecified(“ID1”).
“Comp. ID”: Nameofthecomponentthathasbeenspecified(“ID2”).
“Lot ID”: Specifiedlotname(“ID3").
“Comp”: Contentofthecomponentcounter.
“Nominal”: Targetweightofthecomponent.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Thetolerancesspecifiedforacomponent.
“Tare”: Taredweight(weighingcontainer).
“N”[g]: Netweightofthecurrentcomponent.
“G”: Grossweight(netweight+tareweight).
“N”[%]: The weight of the current component as a % of the targetweight.
“Diff.”[g]: Thedifferencebetweenactualweightand targetweightof thecurrentcomponent.
“Diff.”[%]: Thedifferencebetweentheactualweightofthecurrentcomponentanditstargetweightasapercentage.
“Nominal Tot”: Thetotalofthetargetweightsofallcomponentsthathavebeenweighed.
“Net Tot”: Totalnetweightofallcomponentsthathavebeenweighed.
The“Density”application
85
J
I
10 The “Density” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
InthisSectionwedescribethe“Density”application.Youwillfindinformationhereaboutpracticalaspectsofworkingwiththisapplicationandaboutitsspecificsettings.(InformationaboutthesystemsettingsthatarenotspecifictotheapplicationaretobefoundinSection6.)
10.1 Introduction to the “Density” application.The“Density”applicationallowsthedensityofsolidobjects, liquidsandpastestobefound.Anidentifiercanbeassignedtoeverysample,andtheintegratedstatisticfunctionspermitstatisticalanalysisofseriesofmeasurements.Thedensityisdeterminedexploitingtheprinciple of Archimedes,whichstatesthatanybodyimmersedinafluidbecomeslighterbyanamountequaltotheweightofthefluidthatithasdisplaced.
Youcanuseyourbalance’shanger(forweighingbelowthebalance)tocarryoutdensitydeterminations(Section2.8).Werecommend,however,thattofindthedensityofsolidobjectsyoumakeuseoftheoptionaldensitykit;thiscontainsallthenecessaryfittingsandauxiliaryequipmentforconvenient,accuratedensitymeasurements.Thedensitykithasaseparatesetofinstructionsthatexplainhowitisinstalledandused.
Todeterminethedensityofliquidsyoualsoneedasinker,andthistoocanbeobtainedfromyourMETTLERTOLEDOdealer.Agamma spherewillalsobeneededtodeterminethedensityofpastes;yourdealerwillbegladtotellyouwhereonecanbeobtained.
Followtheinstructionsthatareincludedwiththeseaccessories;theycontainusefulinformationonhowtoworkwiththeseaids,howtohandlethemandhowtolookafterthem.
10.2 Select the applicationUnlessthe“Density”applicationisalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Presstheiconforthe“Density”applicationintheselectionwindow.
Thefollowingdisplayappearswhentheapplicationhasbeenselected.Specialfunctionkeysandinformationfieldsfordensityareactivatedunderthefactorysettings.Thebalanceispresettodeterminethedensityofsolidobjectsusingwaterastheauxiliaryliquid.Youcanadaptthesesettingstoyourownrequirements,asdescribedinthefollowingSections.
Note: If the information fieldsarenotdisplayedon yourbalance,press the“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeofthedisplayoftheweight,andtherebyprovidespacefortheinformationfieldstobeshown.
10.3 Settings for the “Density” applicationAnumberofdifferentsettingsareavailablefordensitydetermination,andthesecanbeusedtoadapttheapplicationtosuityourneeds.
10.3.1 Overview
Theapplication-specificsettingscanbeaccessedviathe«J»key.Thefirstofatotaloffourmenupagesappearsafterpressingthiskey.
The“Density”application
86
Someofthesettingsthatcanbemadeforthe“Density”applicationareidenticaltothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2).Onlydifferencesinthesettingsaredescribedbelow.Theseconcernthefollowingmenus:
“Solid”: Determinationofthedensityofnon-poroussolidbodieswiththeaidofanauxiliaryliquid.
“Liquid”: Determiningthedensityofliquidsusingasinker.
“Pasty Subst.”: Determining the density of pastes with the aid of a gammasphere.
Factory setting: The“Solid"methodisactive.
“Method”:Youcanselect the typeofdensitydeter-minationinthismenu.
“Aux. Liquid”:You can specify the auxiliary liquid withwhichyouwillbeworkinginthismenu.
“Statistics”:Youactivateordeactivatethestatisticsforthechosenmethodinthismenu.
“Result Output Format”:Youcanspecifyinthismenuhowthere-sultof thedensitydetermination is tobecalculatedanddisplayed.
“Function Keys”: Anumberofspecialfunctionkeysareavailablefordensitydetermination.
“Info Field”: Additionalinformationfieldsareavailablefordensitydetermination.
“Protocol”: Additionalprintinginformationisavailablefordensitydetermination.
InthefollowingSectionswewillpresentthespecificsettingsforthe“Density”applicationindetail.
10.3.2 Choosing the method of density determinationYouspecifythetypeofdensitydeterminationthatyouwanttocarryoutinthismenu:
10.3.3 Selection of the auxiliary liquidYouspecifytheauxiliaryliquidthatyouwanttouseinthismenu.This setting is only of significance when determining the density of solid bodies!Thefollowingauxiliaryliquidsareavailable:
“Water”: Thedensityofdistilledwateratvarioustemperatures(from10°Cupto30°C)isstoredinthebalance.
“Ethanol”: Thedensityofethanolatvarioustemperatures(from10°Cupto30°C)isalsostoredinthebalance.
“Others”: Anyother liquid. Itsdensityat thecurrent temperaturemustbeknown.
Factory setting: “Water”issetastheauxiliaryliquid.
The“Density”application
87
10.3.4 Activate or deactivate the statisticsThebalancecanmaintainitsownstatisticsforeachmethodofdensitydeterminationwiththeresultsofthedensitydeterminationswhichhavebeentransferredintothestatistics(max.651500).Ifthestatisticsareactivated,thenattheendofeachdensitydeterminationyouwillbeaskedwhetheryouwanttoaddtheresultstothestatistics.Youcanactivateordeactivatethestatisticalfunctioninthismenu:
“On”: Thestatisticalfunctionisactive.
“Off”: Thestatisticalfunctionisnotactive.
Factory setting: Thestatisticalfunctionisnotactive(“Off"”).
Note:Youmustalsoactivatethetwoassociatedfunctionkeysinordertomakeuseofthestatistics(Section10.3.6).YouwillfindinformationonworkingwiththestatisticsinSection10.5.
10.3.5 Specifications for calculating and displaying the resultYouspecifyinthismenuthenumberofdecimalfiguresandtheunitinwhichtheresultofthedensitydeterminationistobecalculatedanddisplayed.Youalsospecifywhetheratmosphericbuoyancyshouldbeincludedinthecalculation.
“No. of Dec’points.”: Theresultofthedensitydeterminationcanbedisplayedandprintedwithbetween1and5decimalfigures.
“Compensation”: Theresultofthedensitydeterminationcanbecorrectedusingacorrectionfactorthatallowsfortheforcecalibrationandforthemeanatmosphericdensity(setting“With”).Thereisnocompensationif“Without”isset.Boththecorrectedandtheuncorrectedresultsaredisplayedandprintedifthe“With/Without”settingischosen.
“Density Unit”: Youcanspecifytheunittobeusedforthedensitydeterminationhere:“g/cm3”,“kg/m3”or“g/l”(gramsperliter).
Factory setting: Numberofdecimalfigures: “3” Compensation: “With”(correction) Densityunit: “g/cm3” .
10.3.6 Special function keys for density determinationAdditionalsettingsareavailableinthefunctionkeymenufordensitydetermination:
“Start”: Youcanstartthedensitydeterminationwiththisfunctionkey,anditisthereforeessentialthatthiskeyisactive!
“Density AL”: Youcanenterthedensityoftheauxiliaryliquidwiththisfunctionkey.Thiskeyisonlynecessarywhendeterminingthedensityofsolidbodiesandwhentheauxiliaryliquidbeingusedisneitherwaternorethanol.
“Temp. AL”: Youcanenterthetemperature of the auxiliary liquidwiththisfunctionkey.Thiskeyisonlyrequiredwhendistilledwaterorethanolarebeingused,sinceforanyotherliquiditisnecessarytoenterthedensityatthecurrenttemperature.Whenmethodsthatdonotemployanauxiliaryliquidarebeingused,thekeycanbeusedtoenterthecurrentambienttemperaturesothatthisappearsontheprintouts.
The“Density”application
88
“Vol. Sinker”: Thevolume of the sinkercanbeenteredwiththisfunctionkey(incm3,max.5decimalfigures).Youonlyneedactivatethiskeyifyouwanttouseasinkertodeterminethedensityofliquids.
“Vol. Gamma”: Thevolume of the gamma spherecanbeenteredwiththisfunc-tionkey(incm3,max.5decimalfigures).Youonlyneedactivatethiskeyifyouwanttouseagammaspheretodeterminethedensityofpastes.
“Result”: Youcandisplay thestatistics for thecurrentmethodofdensitydeterminationwiththisfunctionkey.Note:Youonlyneedtoactivatethisfunctionkeyifyouhavealsoactivatedthestatisticalfunctions(Section10.3.4). If thestatistical systemdoesnotcontainanyresults,thekeyappearsgrayandcannotbeoperated.
“CL Result”: Youcanclearthestatisticaldatafromthecurrentmethodofdensitydeterminationwiththisfunctionkey,sothatitispossibletostartanewseriesofmeasurements.
Alltheremainingfunctionkeyscorrespondtothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Sec-tion7.2.2).
Factory setting: “Start”,“Temp.AL”and“Display”areactive(inthissequence).
“Method”: Typeofdensitydeterminationthathasbeenchosen.
“Aux. Liquid”: Auxiliaryliquidchosen(fordeterminingthedensityofsolidbod-ies).
“Temp. AL”: Temperatureoftheauxiliaryliquid(distilledwater,ethanol).Thetemperaturevalueenteredthroughthefunctionkeyofthesamenameisdisplayed.
“Density AL”: Thedensityoftheauxiliaryliquid.(Inthecaseofwateroretha-nolthisisautomaticallyreadanddisplayedfromtheintegratedtableofdensities,whileinthecaseofotherauxiliaryliquidsthedensityvalueenteredusingthefunctionkeyofthesamenameisdisplayed).
“Vol. Sinker”: Thevolumeofthesinker(whendeterminingthedensityofliquidsusingasinker).
“Vol. Gamma”: Thevolumeofthegammasphere(whendeterminingthedensityofpasteswiththeaidofagammasphere).
Alltheotherinformationfieldscorrespondtothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Sec-tion7.2.3).
Factory setting: “Method”, “Aux. Liquid” and “Temp. AL” are active (in thissequence).
10.3.7 Special information fields for density determinationAdditionalsettingsareavailableonthefirsttwopagesoftheinformationfieldsmenufordensitydetermination:
The“Density”application
89
10.3.8 Special print information for density determinationAdditionalsettingsfordensitydetermination,describedbelow,areavailableinthethreesubmenusinwhichyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheprintoutheader,forprintingtheindividualvalues,andforthestatisticalprintout.
Note:Theremainingavailableprintoutinformationcorrespondstothatforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.7),andisnotdescribedhere.
The printout header
Additionalsettingsfordensitydeterminationareavailableonthesecondandthirdpagesofthissubmenu:
“Method”: Printstheselectedmethodofdensitydetermination.
“Aux. Liquid”: Printsthechosenauxiliaryliquid(fordeterminingthedensityofsolidbodies).
“Density AL”: Printsthedensityoftheauxiliaryliquid(enteredthroughthefunc-tionkeywiththesamename;inthecaseofwaterorethanolthevaluetakenfromtheintegratedtableisprinted).
“Temp. AL”: Printstheauxiliaryliquidenteredthroughthefunctionkeywiththesamename(forwaterandethanol).
“Vol. Sinker”: Printsthevolumeofthesinkerenteredthroughthefunctionkeywith the same name (when determining the density of liquidsusingasinker).
“Vol. Gamma”: Printsthevolumeofthegammasphereenteredthroughthefunc-tionkeywiththesamename(whendeterminingthedensityofpastesusingagammasphere).
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(theapplication’sidentifier)isactivated.
Theheaderisautomaticallyprintedwhenasinglevalueisprintedout(describedbe-low).
Printing the individual values
Thefollowingsettingsareavailableinthissubmenugoverningtheprintingofindividualdensitydeterminations:
“Method”: Printstheselectedmethodofdensitydetermination.
“Aux. Liquid”: Printsthechosenauxiliaryliquid(fordeterminingthedensityofsolidbodies).
“Density AL”: Printsthedensityoftheauxiliaryliquid(enteredthroughthefunc-tionkeywiththesamename;inthecaseofwaterorethanolthevaluetakenfromtheintegratedtableisprinted).
“Temp. AL”: Printstheauxiliaryliquidenteredthroughthefunctionkeywiththesamename(forwaterandethanol).
“Vol. Sinker”: Printsthevolumeofthesinkerenteredthroughthefunctionkeywith the same name (when determining the density of liquidsusingasinker).
“Vol. Gamma”: Printsthevolumeofthegammasphereenteredthroughthefunc-tionkeywiththesamename(whendeterminingthedensityofpastesusingagammasphere).
The“Density”application
90
“Wgt. in Air”: Printsthedensityofthesampleinair(whendeterminingthedensityofsolidbodies).
“Wgt. in Liquid”: Printstheweightofthesampleintheauxiliaryliquid(whende-terminingthedensityofsolidbodies)ortheweightofthesamplematerialdisplacedbythesinkerorbythegammasphere.
“Vol. Sample”: Printsthevolumeofthesample.
“Density”: Printstheresultofthecurrentdensitydetermination.
Factory setting: “DashLine”,“Method”,“Density”and“3BlankLines”.
Theprintoutfortheindividualvaluecanbemadebypressingthe«F»key.YouwillfindasampleprintoutinSection10.4.4.
Printing statistical data
Youcanspecifythestatisticalinformationthatistobeprintedonthesecond,thirdandfourthpagesofthissubmenu.Thesettingsareonlyrelevant ifyouhaveactivatedthestatisticalfunction(Section10.3.4).
“Method”: Theselectedmethodofdensitydetermination.
“Aux. Liquid”: Chosenauxiliaryliquid(fordeterminingthedensityofsolidbod-ies).
“n”: Numberofsamplesinthecurrentseriesofmeasurements.
“x”: Meandensityofallthesamples.
“s”and“s.rel”: Absolute or relative standard deviation, respectively, within thecurrentseriesofmeasurements.
“Min”and“Max”: Smallestandlargestdensitiesfoundinthecurrentseriesofmea-surements.
“Diff”: Thedifferencebetweenthesmallestandlargestdensitiesinthecurrentseriesofmeasurements.
Factory setting: “n”,“x”,“s”,“Min”and“Max”.The“Signature”,“DashLine”and“3BlankLines”settingsarealsoactive.
Thestatisticscanbeprintedoutbypressingthe«F»keywhilethestatisticswindowisopen.Asampleprintout,andnotesonthestatistics,maybefoundinSection10.5.
The“Density”application
91
10.4 Working with the “Density” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“Density”applicationandthevariousmethodsofdeterminingdensity.Itisassumedthatthe“Density”applicationhasalreadybeenselected.Thefollowingexplanationsassumethatthestatisticalfunctionisnotactive(notesonusingthestatisticalfunctionsmaybefoundinSection10.5).
10.4.1 Determining the density of non-porous solid bodiesTodeterminethedensityofnon-poroussolidbodies,thesolidbodyisfirstweighedinairandthenintheauxiliaryliquid.Thedifferenceinweightsisthebuoyancy,withtheaidofwhichthesoftwarecalculatesthedensity.
Intheapplication-specificsettings,select“Solid”asthemethod(Section10.3.2)andspecifytheauxiliaryliquidthatwillbeused(Section10.3.3).
Activate the appropriate function keys and information fields (Sections 10.3.6and10.3.7).Note:Theexampleshownhereillustratessettingsfordeterminingthedensityofsolidbodiesusingdistilledwaterastheauxiliaryliquid.Ifanauxiliaryliquidotherthanwaterorethanolisused,theninsteadofthe“Temp.AL”keyyoushouldactivatethe“DensityAL”key.
Ifyouareusingwater or ethanol as the auxiliary liquid,enteritstemperature usingthe“Temp. AL”functionkey.(Densitytablesforthesetwosubstancescoveringthetem-peraturerangefrom10°Cupto30°Carestoredinthebalance;seealsoSections10.7and10.8.).Theillustrationhereshowsthecorrespondinginputfield(inputin°Cwith1decimalfigure).
Ifyouuseanauxiliary liquidother thanwaterorethanol,activatethe“DensityAL”func-tionkey,anduseittoenterthe density of the auxiliary liquid being used at the cur-rent temperature (ing/cm3,max.5decimalplaces).Thisisnecessarybecausedensitytablesareonlysavedforwaterandethanol.Thevalueyouhaveenteredappearsintheinformationfieldwiththesamename,whichyoushouldalsoactivate.Note: The“Temp. AL”functionkey,activeintheexampleshownhere,isnotnecessaryfordeterminingdensitywhenusinganauxiliaryliquidotherthanwaterorethanol.Youcan,nevertheless,useitenterthecurrentambienttemperature.Thiswillinturnalsobeincludedontheprintout,andrecordsthetemperatureatwhichthedensitywasdetermined.
Pressthe“Start”functionkeytostartthedensitydetermination.Thebalancewillautomati-callycarryoutataring,afterwhichyouwillbepromptedtoputthesolidbodyinplace(weighinginair).
Ifyouareusingthehanger(forweighingunderneaththebalance),hangthesolidbodyfromthesuspensionequipment.Ifyouareworkingwiththeoptionaldensitykit,followtheinstructionsthatareincludedwithit.
Theweightofthesolidbodyappearsinthelowerleft-handcornerofthewindow.
Pressthe“OK”,keytoaccepttheweightmeasurement.
The“Density”application
92
Theresultoftheweighingisstored,afterwhichyouarepromptedtoimmersethesolidbodyintheauxiliaryliquid.
Ifyouareworkingwiththehanger,placethecontainerwiththeauxiliaryliquidunder-neaththesuspensionequipment.Ifyouareworkingwiththeoptionaldensitykit,followthe instructions thatare includedwith it. Ineithercase,ensure that thesolidbody issubmergedatleast1cmunderthesurfaceoftheliquid,andthattherearenoairbubblesinthecontainer.
Theweightofthesolidbodysubmergedintheliquidisdisplayedinthelowerleft-handcornerofthewindow.
Pressthe“OK”,keytoaccepttheweightmeasurement.
Thebalancenowdeterminesthedensityofthesolidbody,andthendisplaystheresult(thecompensatedand/oruncompensatedvalue,dependingonthesettingsthatyouhavemadeforoutputoftheresult,seeSection10.3.5).
Ifaprinterisconnected,theresultofthedensitydeterminationcanbeprintedinaccordancewithyourspecificationsbypressingthe«F»key(Section10.3.8).Theresultisretaineduntilthenextdensitydeterminationusingthesamemethodhasbeencompleted,andcanbeprintedagainifrequired.YouwillfindasampleprintouttogetherwithcorrespondingexplanationsinSection10.4.4.
10.4.2 Determining the density of liquids using a sinkerAsinkerofknownvolumeisoftenusedtodeterminethedensityofliquids.Thesinkermustfirstbetaredinairandthenweighedintheliquidwhosedensityistobefound.Thedifferenceinweightsisthebuoyancy,withtheaidofwhichthesoftwarecalculatesthedensity.
Intheapplication-specificsettings,selectthe“Liquid”method(Section10.3.2).
Activatetheappropriatefunction keys and information fields(Sections10.3.6and10.3.7).Theexampleshownhereillustratespracticalsettingsfordeterminingthedensityofliquidswiththeuseofasinker.Note:The“Temp. AL”keythatisactiveinthisexampleisnotnecessaryforthismethodofdensitydetermination.Youcan,nevertheless,useittoenterthecurrentambienttemperature.Thiswillinturnalsobeincludedontheprintout,andindicatesthetemperatureatwhichthedensitywasdetermined.
Press the“Vol. Sinker”key,andenter thevolumeof thesinker (10.00000cm3 in thisexample).
Pressthe“Start”functionkeytostartthedensitydetermination.Youarepromptedtoattachthesinker(weighinginairfortaring).
Ifyouareusingthehangerforweighingunderneaththebalance,hangthesinkerfromthesuspensionequipment. If youareworkingwith theoptionaldensitykit, follow theinstructionsthatareincludedwithit.
Theweightofthesinkerappearsinthelowerleft-handcornerofthewindow.
Pressthe“OK”keytotarethesinkerandrecordtheweight.
The“Density”application
93
10.4.3 Determining the density of pastes with the aid of a gamma sphereAgammasphereofknownvolumeisusuallyusedtodeterminethedensityofpastes.Thepasteisfirsttaredwithoutthegammasphere,andthenweighedwiththegammasphere.
In the application-specific settings, select “Pasty Subst.” as the method (Section10.3.2).
Activatetheappropriatefunction keys and information fields (Sections10.3.6and10.3.7).Theexampleshownhereillustratespracticalsettingsfordeterminingthedensityofpastesthroughtheuseofagammasphere.Note: The“Temp. AL”keythatisactiveinthisexampleisnotnecessaryforthismethodofdensitydetermination.Youcan,nevertheless,useitenterthecurrentambienttemperature.Thiswillinturnalsobeincludedontheprintout,andindicatesthetemperatureatwhichthedensitywasdetermined.
Press the“Vol. Gamma” function key and enter the volume of the gamma sphere(10.00000cm3inthisexample).
Pressthe“Start”functionkeytostartthedensitydetermination.Youwillthenbepromptedtoplacethesampleonthepan(withoutthegammasphere).
Theweightofthesampleappearsinthelowerleft-handcornerofthewindow.
Pressthe“OK”keytotarethesampleandtoregistertheweight.
Aftertaringthesinkeryouarepromptedtoputtheliquidwhosedensityistobedeterminedintoacontainer.Ifyouareworkingwiththehanger(forweighingunderneaththebal-ance),placethecontainerwiththeliquidunderneaththesuspensionequipment.Ifyouareworkingwiththeoptionaldensitykit,followtheinstructionsthatareincludedwithit.Ineithercase,ensurethatthesinkerissubmergedatleast1cmunderthesurfaceoftheliquid,andthattherearenoairbubblesinthecontainer.
The buoyancy of the sinker is displayed in the lower left-hand corner of the window(negativevalue).
Pressthe“OK”,keytoaccepttheweightmeasurement.
Thebalancenowdeterminesthedensityoftheliquid,andthendisplaystheresult(thecompensatedand/oruncompensatedvalue,dependingonthesettingsthatyouhavemadeforoutputoftheresult,seeSection10.3.5).
Ifaprinterisconnected,theresultofthedensitydeterminationcanbeprintedinaccordancewithyourspecificationsbypressingthe«F»key(Section10.3.8).Theresultisretaineduntilthenextdensitydeterminationusingthesamemethodhasbeencompleted,andcanbeprintedagainifrequired.
The“Density”application
94
-------- Density -------6.Sep 2004 14:47Balance Type XS6002SX
Customer Meray Ltd.Lot 12-4Sample 01Method SolidLiquid WaterDensity AL 0.99798 g/cm3Temperature 21.2 °C Wgt. in Air 21.51 g Wgt. in Liquid 14.39 g Density 3.015 g/cm3 =============
Signature
........................
Whenthesamplehasbeentared,youwillbepromptedtosubmergethegammasphereinthesamplesubstance.
Theweightofthesubstancedisplacedbythegammasphereisdisplayedinthelowerleft-handcornerofthewindow.
Pressthe“OK”,keytoaccepttheweightmeasurement.
Thebalancenowdeterminesthedensityofthepaste,andthendisplaystheresult(thecompensatedand/oruncompensatedvalue,dependingonthesettingsthatyouhavemadeforoutputoftheresult,seeSection10.3.5).
Ifaprinterisconnected,theresultofthedensitydeterminationcanbeprintedinaccordancewithyourspecificationsbypressingthe«F»key(Section10.3.8).Theresultisretaineduntilthenextdensitydeterminationusingthesamemethodhasbeencompleted,andcanbeprintedagainifrequired.
10.4.4 Sample printout of a density determinationAssoonastheresultwindowofadensitydeterminationisdisplayed,youcanprintouttheassociatedreportbypressingthe«F»key.
Note:Theresultisretaineduntilthenextdensitydeterminationhasbeencompleted,andcanbeprintedagainifrequiredbypressingthe«F»key.Thismaybenecessaryifyourequireasecondcopyoftheprintout,orifapapershortagecausestheprintertobeunabletocompletetheprintsuccessfully.
Theillustrationhereshowsasampleprintoutfromthedensity determination of a solid body.Thesettingsyoumakeinthe“Protocol”menucontrolstheinformationthatisprinted(Section10.3.8).
The identification keys that youalready know from theweighingapplicationarealsousedduringdensitydetermination.Inthisexample,theIDkeysareusedtoidentifythecustomer,thebatchandthesample.
The“Density”application
95
10.5 Using the density statisticsStatisticscanbecollectedforeachmethodofdensitydetermination.Thesestorealltheresultsthatyouhavefoundwhilstcarryingoutthedensitydeterminations.
Default settings
Inordertobeabletousethestatisticssystem,the statistic function (Section10.3.4)andboththe“Result”and“CL Result”keysmustbeactivated(Section10.3.6).
Recording values for the statistics
Whenthestatisticfunctionisactive,youwillbeaskedattheendofeachdensitydeter-minationwhethertheresultshouldbetransferredtothestatistics.
Ifyouwanttoaddtheresultofthecurrentmeasurementtothestatistics,pressthe“Yes”key.Theresultwillbeincorporatedintothe statistics for the current method.Transferoftheresultisconfirmedonthedisplay.Ifyoudonotwanttoincludetheresultinthestatistics,press“No”.Althoughtheresultwillberetaineduntilcompletionofthenextmeasurement, itwillnotbeaddedtothestatistics.
Displaying and printing the statistics
Makesurethatthemethodofdensitydeterminationwhosestatisticsyouwanttodisplayorprintisselected(Section10.3.2).
Pressthe“Result”functionkeytocallupthestatistics.Note:Ifthestatisticalsystemdoesnotcontainanyvalues,thekeyappearsgrayandcannotbeactivated.
The information that youhave selected forprinting statistical datawill appear in thestatisticswindow(Section10.3.8).Thefactorysettingisforthefollowingvalues:
“n”: Numberofsamples
“x”: Meandensityofallsamples
“s”: Absolutestandarddeviationwithinaseriesofmeasurements
“Min”: Lowestdensityfoundwithintheseriesofmeasurements
“Max”: Highestdensityfoundwithintheseriesofmeasurements
The“Density”application
96
-------- Density -------6.Sep 2004 15:06Balance Type XS6002SXMethod SolidLiquid Water
With Compensationn 4x 2.4358 g/cm3s 0.1974 g/cm3s.rel 8.11 % Min 2.251 g/cm3Max 2.686 g/cm3Diff 0.435 g/cm3
Without Compensationn 4x 2.4375 g/cm3s 0.1977 g/cm3s.rel 8.11 % Min 2.253 g/cm3Max 2.688 g/cm3Diff 0.435 g/cm3
Signature
........................------------------------
Press the«F» key toprint thestatistics.Thevariables that youhaveactivated in the“Statistics”submenuoftheprintoutsettingswillbeprinted(Section10.3.8).Asampleprintoutisillustratedhere.
Clear statistics
Ifyouwanttofinishwithaseriesofmeasurements,pressthe“CL Result”functionkeytocleartheassociatedstatistics.
Note:The“CL Result”functionkeyclearsthestatisticsforthemethodofdensitydeter-minationthatiscurrentlyselected;thestatisticsfortheothermethodsareretained.Takecare,therefore,beforeyouclearanystatistics,thatthemethodofdensitydeterminationselectedistheonewhosestatisticsyouwanttodelete!
Forsecurityreasonsapromptwillappear,andyouwillhavetoconfirmthisbeforethestatisticsareactuallycleared.
The“Density”application
97
10.6 Formulae used to calculate density
The“Density”applicationisbasedontheformulaelistedbelow.
10.6.1 Formulae for determining the density of solid bodies
With compensation for air density Without compensation for air density
ρ = Densityofthesample
A = Weightofthesampleinair
B = Weightofthesampleintheauxiliaryliquid
V = Volumeofthesample
ρ0 = Densityoftheauxiliaryliquid
ρL = Airdensity(0.0012g/cm3)
α = Weightcorrectionfactor(0.99985),takestheatmosphericbuoyancyoftheadjustmentweightintoaccount.
10.6.2 Formulae for determining the density of liquids and pastes
With compensation for air density Without compensation for air density
ρ = Densityoftheliquidorpaste
P = Weightofthedisplacedliquidorpaste
V0 = Volumeofthesinkerorofthegammasphere
ρL = Airdensity(0.0012g/cm3)
α = Weightcorrectionfactor(0.99985),takestheatmosphericbuoyancyoftheadjustmentweightintoaccount.
V=αA–Bρ0–ρL
ρ=+ρLα•P
V0
V= A–Bρ0
ρ= PV0
ρ=A• ρ0
A–Bρ=(ρ0–ρL)+ρL
AA–B
The“Density”application
98
10.7 Density table for distilled waterT/°C 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
10. 0.99973 0.99972 0.99971 0.99970 0.99969 0.99968 0.99967 0.99966 0.99965 0.99964
11. 0.99963 0.99962 0.99961 0.99960 0.99959 0.99958 0.99957 0.99956 0.99955 0.99954
12. 0.99953 0.99951 0.99950 0.99949 0.99948 0.99947 0.99946 0.99944 0.99943 0.99942
13. 0.99941 0.99939 0.99938 0.99937 0.99935 0.99934 0.99933 0.99931 0.99930 0.99929
14. 0.99927 0.99926 0.99924 0.99923 0.99922 0.99920 0.99919 0.99917 0.99916 0.99914
15. 0.99913 0.99911 0.99910 0.99908 0.99907 0.99905 0.99904 0.99902 0.99900 0.99899
16. 0.99897 0.99896 0.99894 0.99892 0.99891 0.99889 0.99887 0.99885 0.99884 0.99882
17. 0.99880 0.99879 0.99877 0.99875 0.99873 0.99871 0.99870 0.99868 0.99866 0.99864
18. 0.99862 0.99860 0.99859 0.99857 0.99855 0.99853 0.99851 0.99849 0.99847 0.99845
19. 0.99843 0.99841 0.99839 0.99837 0.99835 0.99833 0.99831 0.99829 0.99827 0.99825
20. 0.99823 0.99821 0.99819 0.99817 0.99815 0.99813 0.99811 0.99808 0.99806 0.99804
21. 0.99802 0.99800 0.99798 0.99795 0.99793 0.99791 0.99789 0.99786 0.99784 0.99782
22. 0.99780 0.99777 0.99775 0.99773 0.99771 0.99768 0.99766 0.99764 0.99761 0.99759
23. 0.99756 0.99754 0.99752 0.99749 0.99747 0.99744 0.99742 0.99740 0.99737 0.99735
24. 0.99732 0.99730 0.99727 0.99725 0.99722 0.99720 0.99717 0.99715 0.99712 0.99710
25. 0.99707 0.99704 0.99702 0.99699 0.99697 0.99694 0.99691 0.99689 0.99686 0.99684
26. 0.99681 0.99678 0.99676 0.99673 0.99670 0.99668 0.99665 0.99662 0.99659 0.99657
27. 0.99654 0.99651 0.99648 0.99646 0.99643 0.99640 0.99637 0.99634 0.99632 0.99629
28. 0.99626 0.99623 0.99620 0.99617 0.99614 0.99612 0.99609 0.99606 0.99603 0.99600
29. 0.99597 0.99594 0.99591 0.99588 0.99585 0.99582 0.99579 0.99576 0.99573 0.99570
30. 0.99567 0.99564 0.99561 0.99558 0.99555 0.99552 0.99549 0.99546 0.99543 0.99540
10.8 Density table for ethanolT/°C 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
10. 0.79784 0.79775 0.79767 0.79758 0.79750 0.79741 0.79733 0.79725 0.79716 0.79708
11. 0.79699 0.79691 0.79682 0.79674 0.79665 0.79657 0.79648 0.79640 0.79631 0.79623
12. 0.79614 0.79606 0.79598 0.79589 0.79581 0.79572 0.79564 0.79555 0.79547 0.79538
13. 0.79530 0.79521 0.79513 0.79504 0.79496 0.79487 0.79479 0.79470 0.79462 0.79453
14. 0.79445 0.79436 0.79428 0.79419 0.79411 0.79402 0.79394 0.79385 0.79377 0.79368
15. 0.79360 0.79352 0.79343 0.79335 0.79326 0.79318 0.79309 0.79301 0.79292 0.79284
16. 0.79275 0.79267 0.79258 0.79250 0.79241 0.79232 0.79224 0.79215 0.79207 0.79198
17. 0.79190 0.79181 0.79173 0.79164 0.79156 0.79147 0.79139 0.79130 0.79122 0.79113
18. 0.79105 0.79096 0.79088 0.79079 0.79071 0.79062 0.79054 0.79045 0.79037 0.79028
19. 0.79020 0.79011 0.79002 0.78994 0.78985 0.78977 0.78968 0.78960 0.78951 0.78943
20. 0.78934 0.78926 0.78917 0.78909 0.78900 0.78892 0.78883 0.78874 0.78866 0.78857
21. 0.78849 0.78840 0.78832 0.78823 0.78815 0.78806 0.78797 0.78789 0.78780 0.78772
22. 0.78763 0.78755 0.78746 0.78738 0.78729 0.78720 0.78712 0.78703 0.78695 0.78686
23. 0.78678 0.78669 0.78660 0.78652 0.78643 0.78635 0.78626 0.78618 0.78609 0.78600
24. 0.78592 0.78583 0.78575 0.78566 0.78558 0.78549 0.78540 0.78532 0.78523 0.78515
25. 0.78506 0.78497 0.78489 0.78480 0.78472 0.78463 0.78454 0.78446 0.78437 0.78429
26. 0.78420 0.78411 0.78403 0.78394 0.78386 0.78377 0.78368 0.78360 0.78351 0.78343
27. 0.78334 0.78325 0.78317 0.78308 0.78299 0.78291 0.78282 0.78274 0.78265 0.78256
28. 0.78248 0.78239 0.78230 0.78222 0.78213 0.78205 0.78196 0.78187 0.78179 0.78170
29. 0.78161 0.78153 0.78144 0.78136 0.78127 0.78118 0.78110 0.78101 0.78092 0.78084
30. 0.78075 0.78066 0.78058 0.78049 0.78040 0.78032 0.78023 0.78014 0.78006 0.77997
DensityofC2H5OHaccordingtothe“AmericanInstituteofPhysicsHandbook”.
The“PercentWeighing”application
99
I
J
11 The “Percent Weighing” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly) InthisSectionyouwillbeintroducedtothe“PercentWeighing”application.Youwillfindpracticalinformationaboutworkingwiththisapplicationandaboutthedifferentsettings.(Youwillfindinformationaboutnon-application-specificsystemsettingsinSection6).
11.1 Introduction to the “Percent Weighing” application The“PercentWeighing”applicationenablesyoutoweightoaspecifiedvalue(100%)anddetectdeviationsfromthistargetvalue.
Manyoftheapplication-dependentsettingsareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application.However,additionalsettingsareavail-abletoyouforpercentweighing.Inthedescriptionthatfollows,onlythosesettingsareexplainedindetailwhicharedifferentfromthe“Weighing”application.
11.2 Selecting the application
11.3 Settings for the “Percent Weighing” application Forpercentweighingyouhavevariousspecificsettingsavailablewhichyoucanusetoadapttheapplicationtoyourneeds.
11.3.1 Overview
Ifthe“PercentWeighing”applicationisnotalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Intheselec-tionwindow,touchthesymbolfortheapplication.
Afteryouhaveselectedtheapplication,thedisplayshownatleftappears.Someofthespecialfunctionkeysandthespecialinformationfieldsforpercentweighingareactivatedatthefactory.Howyoucanadaptthese,andother,settingstoyourneedsisdescribedintheSectionsthatfollow.
Note: If the information fieldsarenotdisplayedon yourbalance,press the“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeoftheweightdisplayandtherebymakeroomtodisplaytheinformationfields.
Theapplication-dependentsettingscanbeaccessedwiththe«J»key.Whenthiskeyispressed,thefirstof4menupagesappears.
The“PercentWeighing”application
100
11.3.3 Special information fields for percent weighingOnthefirstpageofthemenuforinfofieldsthefollowingsettingsforpercentweighingareavailable:
“Reference%: Referencevalueinpercent(always100%).
“Reference”: Absoluteweightvalueofthereference.
“Target value”: Displaysthetargetweightwhichwasinputwiththisfunctionkey.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Theseinformationfieldsdisplaythetoleranceswhichwereinputwiththisfunctionkey.
All other information fields are the same as for the“Weighing” application (Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: “Reference%”and“Reference”activated(inthisorder).
Withonlyafewexceptions,thesettingsavailableinthe“PercentWeighing”applicationareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”applica-tion(Section7.2).Onlythesettingsthataredifferentaredescribedbelow.Thesesettingsarecontainedinthefollowingmenus:
“Function Keys”:Additional functionkeysareavailable forpercentweighing.
“Info Fields”:Additionalinformationfieldsareavailableforpercentweighing.
“Display Unit”and“Info Unit”:Anadditionalunit“%”(percent)isavailableforpercentweighing.
“Reports”:Additionalinformationisavailableforper-centweighingreports.
“Set100%”: Youcanusethisfunctionkeytodefinethecurrentweightvalueasthereference(100%)(Section11.4.1).
“Nominal value”: Specifiesthedesiredtargetweight(Section11.4.2).Thisisalsousedasreferenceforthetolerances.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Specifiestheaccuracy(tolerances)forthepercentweighing(Sec-tion11.4.2).
Allotherfunctionkeysarethesameasforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.2).
Factory setting: “Set100%”and“Display”areactivated(inthisorder).
InthefollowingSectionsyouwillbegivenadetailedintroductiontothespecificsettingsforthe“PercentWeighing”application.
11.3.2 Special function keys for percent weighingThefirstpageofthefunctionkeymenupresentsyouwiththefollowingoptionsforpercentweighing:
The“PercentWeighing”application
101
11.3.5 Special Report Information for percent weighing
Inthethreesubmenuswhereyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheheaderlineofthereport,forreportingtheindividualvalues,andforthefooterline,youalsohaveadditionalsettingsavailableforpercentweighingwhicharedescribedbelow.
Note:Allotherinformationitemsinthereportarethesameasinthe“Weighing”applica-tion(Section7.2.7)andarenotdescribedhere.
Report Header Line
Onthesecondandthirdpagesofthissubmenuthereareadditionalsettingsforpercentweighing:
“Reference%”: Reportsthereferenceinpercentagevalue(always100%).
“Reference”: Reportsthereferenceasaweightvalue.
“Target value”: Reportsthespecifiedtargetvalue.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Reportstheselectedtolerances.
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(“PercentWeighing”);nospecificinformationitemsforpercentweighingareactivated.
Theheaderlineisprintedautomaticallyifitisdefinedtobepartoftheweighingreport(see“ReportingIndividualValues”).However,theheadercanalsobeprintedoutseparatelybypressingthe“Headerline”functionkey.
Reporting Individual Values
Onthefirstandsecondpagesofthissubmenu,thesamespecialsettingsareavailablefor reporting the individual percent weighings as for the header line (“Reference%”,“Reference”,“Targetvalue”,“+Tol”and“–Tol”,seeabove).
Factory setting: “Net”;nospecificinformationitemsforpercentweighingareacti-vated.
Theindividualvaluesareprintedoutbypressingthe«F»keyor,iftheautomaticprintfunctionisactivated,automatically(seeSection7.2.4).
11.3.4 Additional Unit for percent weighing
Inthemenusforthe“DisplayUnit”andthe“InfoUnit”,inadditiontotheknownweighingunits, theunit“%” (percent)isavailable (provided thata referencehasalreadybeendetermined).
Note:Forpercentweighingyoudonotneedtoexplicitlyselectthe“%”unit,sincethedisplayunitisalwaysswitchedoverto“%”automaticallywhenthereferenceisdetermined.Afterwards,youcanselectthedesiredunitagainwheneveryouwantto.
Factory Setting: “g”(gram)for“displayunit”andfor“infounit”.
The“PercentWeighing”application
102
Report Footer Line
Onthesecondandthirdpagesofthissubmenuyoucanspecifywhichspecialitemsofinformationforpercentweighingshouldbeprintedoutinthefooterlineoftheweighingreportaftertheresults(individualvalues).The same settings are available as for the header line and the individual values (“Reference%”,“Reference”,“Targetvalue”,“+Tol”and“–Tol”,asdescribedabove).
Factory setting: “Signature”;nospecific information itemsforpercentweighingareactivated.
Toprintthefooterline,pressthe“Footerline”functionkey.
Youwillfindanexample of a percent weighinginSection11.4.3.
11.4 Working with the “Percent Weighing” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“PercentWeighing”application.Thisapplicationalsoallowsyoutodetermineatare,changetheresolutionofaweighingresult,workwithidentifications,etc.Sinceyouhavealreadylearnthowtodotheseinthe“Weigh-ing”application(Section6.3),theyarenotexplainedagainhere.
11.4.1 Simple percent weighing
Preliminary Settings
Beforeyoucanperformapercentweighing,youmustfirstactivatethefunctionkeyshownatleft(Section11.3.2)sothatyoucandeterminethereference.
Thetwoinformationfields“Reference%”(referencevalueinpercent)and“Reference”(ab-soluteweightvalueofthereference)arebothactivatedatthefactory(Section11.3.3).
Determining the Reference
Placethereferenceweightontheweighingpanandthenpressthe“Set100%”functionkey.
Assoonastheweighingresultisstable,theweightwhichisdeterminedissavedasthereferenceweight.
Intheresultsdisplayandinthe“Reference%”informationfieldthereferencevalue(100%)isdisplayed,whilethe“Reference”informationfielddisplaystheabsoluteweightofthereference.
Performing the Percent Weighing
Afteryouhavedetermined the reference,place theweighingsampleon thepan.Theweightoftheweighingsampleasapercentageofthereferenceweightappearsintheresultsdisplay.Note:Ifinsteadofthepercentageweightyouwanttoknowtheabsoluteweightoftheweighingsimple,touchthe“%”unitandselectthedesiredweighingunit.
Youcanprintouttheresultofthepercentweighingwiththe«F»key.YouwillfindanexampleofareportinSection11.4.3.
The“PercentWeighing”application
103
11.4.2 Percent weighing to a target valueThe“PercentWeighing”applicationprovidesyouwithadditionalfunctionstomakeweighingtoaspecifiedtargetvalueeasier.Inthedescriptionthatfollows,itisassumedthatthereferenceforthepercentweighinghasalreadybeendetermined.
Requirements
Before youcan inputa target valueand theassociated tolerances, the functionkeysshownatleftmustbeactivated(Section11.3.2).Ifyouwantthespecifiedvaluestobeshowninthedisplay,youcanalsoactivatetheinformationfieldswiththesamename(Section11.3.3).
Pressthefunctionkey“Nominal”.Typeinthedesiredtargetvalue(e.g.130%).Checktheweighingunitwhichisdisplayedtotherightofthetargetvalue.Touchingtheweighingunitdisplaystheavailableunits,whichinclude“%”(the“Percent”unitonlybecomesavailableafterthereferencehasbeendetermined).Note:Theunitsarenotconvertedautomatically,soonceyouhave inputavalue inaparticularunit,thevaluedoesnotchangeevenifyouchangetheunit.Whenyouhaveinputthevalue,press“OK”toactivatethetargetvalue.
Youcanusethetwofunctionkeys“+Tol”and“–Tol”tospecifytheaccuracywithwhichyouwanttoweigh.Theinputwindowissimilartotheoneforthereferencevalue.Bothtolerancevaluesaresetto2.5%atthefactory.Whenyouhaveenteredtherespectivepercentagevalue,press“OK”toactivatethetolerance.Percentageweighingswhichlieoutsidethetolerancesarespeciallymarkedinthereportofindividualvalueswith“>T”or“<T”.
Whenyouhaveinputthetargetvalueandthetolerances,tolerancemarksforthegraphicalweighingaid(“SmartTrac”)appearinthedisplay.Thetolerancemarksmakeweighingtothetargetvalueeasierforyou.Youcanweighyourweighingsampleroughlyuntilthelowertolerancevalueisreached,andthenifnecessarydispensefinelyuntilthetargetvalueisreached.
---- Percentweighing ---1.Sep 2004 14:46
Reference% 100.00 % Reference 236.03 g Nominal 130 % +Tol 2.50 % -Tol 2.50 % 128.390 %
Signature
........................
11.4.3 Example of a percent weighing report
Shownatleftisanexampleofareportforapercentweighingwithtargetvalueandtoler-ances.Thevalueswhicharereportedintheheaderline,asindividualvalues,andinthefooterlinedependonyourindividualreportsettings(Section11.3.5).
Onlythoseinformation items shown in the report which specifically relate to percent weighing areexplainedbelow.YouwillfindexplanationsoftheotheritemsinSection7.2.7.
“Reference%”: Referencevalueinpercent(always100%).
“Reference”: Absoluteweightvalueofthereference.
“Target value”: Specifiedtargetvalue(inthisexample,in%).
“+Tol”: Specifiedplustolerancein%.
“–Tol”: Specifiedminustolerancein%.
“128.390”: Resultoftheweighingas%ofthereference.
The“PieceCounting”application
104
I
J
12 The “Piece Counting” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
InthisSectionyouwillbeintroducedtothe“PieceCounting”application.Youwillfindpracticalinformationaboutworkingwiththisap-plicationandaboutthedifferentsettings.(Youwillfindinformationaboutthenon-application-specificsystemsettingsinSection6.)
12.1 Introduction to the “Piece Counting” applicationThe“PieceCounting”applicationallowsyoutocountpieces.Theapplicationprovidesyouwithseveraldifferentmethodsfordetermin-ingthereferencepieceweight.
Manyoftheapplication-specificsettingsareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application.However,additionalapplication-specificsettingsareavailabletoyouforpiececounting.Inthedescriptionsthatfollow,onlythosesettingsareexplainedindetailwhicharedifferentfromthe“Weighing”application.
12.2 Selecting the application
12.3 Settings for the “Piece Counting” applicationForpiececountingyouhavevariousspecificsettingsavailablewhichyoucanusetoadapttheapplicationtoyourneeds.
12.3.1 Overview
Ifthe“PieceCounting”applicationisnotalreadyactive,pressthe«D»key.Intheselectionwindow,touchthesymbolfortheapplication.
Afteryouhaveselectedtheapplication,thedisplayshownatleftappears.Someofthespecialfunctionkeysandinformationfieldsforpiececountingareactivatedatthefactory.HowyoucanadapttheseandothersettingstoyourneedsisdescribedintheSectionsthatfollow.
Note: If the information fieldsarenotdisplayedon yourbalance,press the“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeoftheweightdisplayandtherebymakeroomtodisplaytheinformationfields.
The application-specific settings can be accessed with the «J» key.When this key ispressed,thefirstof4menupagesappears.
The“PieceCounting”application
105
12.3.3 Special function keys for piece countingThefirstthreepagesofthefunctionkeymenuprovideyouwiththefollowingsettingsforpiececounting:
“FixPcs”: Determinesthereferencepieceweightwithaspecifiedfixednum-berofpieces(Section12.4.1).Thespecifiedreferencenumberofpiecesisdisplayedbelowthekey(e.g.“Fix10”).
“VarPcs”: Allows free selection of the reference piece count (Section12.4.1).
“PcsWgt”: Allowsinputoftheknownweightofareferencepiece.
“M+”: Storesthecurrentpiececountinthememory(Section12.4.2).
“Result”: Openstheresultswindow(Section12.4.2).
“CL Result”: Clears the stored values of a series of piece counts (Section12.4.2).
“CL Last”: Clearsthelastpiececountthatwassaved(Section12.4.2).
Withonlyafewexceptions,thesettingsavailableinthe“PieceCounting”applicationareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2).Onlythesettingsthataredifferentaredescribedbelow.Thesesettingsarecontainedinthefollowingmenus:
“FixPcs”:Allows you to specify a fixed referencepiececount.
“Function Keys”:Additional functionkeysareavailable forpiececounting.
“Info Field”:Additionalinformationfieldsareavailableforpiececounting.
“Display Unit”and“Info Unit”:Theadditionalunit“PCS”(pieces)isavail-ableforpiececounting.
“Protocol”:Additionalinformationisavailableforpiececountingreports.
InthefollowingSectionsyouwillbegivenadetailedintroductiontothe“PieceCounting”application.
12.3.2 Specifying the fixed reference piece countIn this menu you can specify the fixed reference piece count which should be represented by the“FixPcs” function key (Section12.3.3).
Afterpressingthecorrespondingbutton,aninputwindowappearsinwhichyoucandefinethedesiredfixedreferencepiececount.
Duringpiececounting,eachtimethe“FixPcs”functionkeyispressed(displayedas“Fixn”,wherenisthespecifiedreferencepiececount)theweightonthebalanceisdividedbythespecifiedfixedreferencepiececount. Inthisway,thereferencepieceweightisdeterminedwhichservesasthebasisforthepiececounting.Factory setting: 10.
The“PieceCounting”application
106
12.3.4 Special information fields for piece countingThefollowingsettingsforpiececountingareavailableonthefirstthreepagesofthemenuforinformationfields:
“RefPcs”: Selectedreferencepiececount.
“PcsWgt”: Referencepieceweight.
“n”: Numberofpiececountsperformedinaseries.
“x”: Average(mean)piececountofallpiececountsinaseries.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standard deviation of a series of piece counts as an absolutenumberandasapercentage.
“Sum”: Accumulatedpiececountofallpiececountsinaseries.
“>T+”and“<T–”: Numberofpiececountsperformedoutsidetheupperandlowertolerancerespectively.
“Min”and“Max”: Lowestandhighestpiececountsinaseriesofpiececounts.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenlowestandhighestpiececountsinaseriesofpiececounts.
“Nominal”: Thetargetpiececountwhichwasinputusingthefunctionkeywiththesamename.
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: These informationfieldsshow the toleranceswhichwere inputusingthefunctionkeyswiththesamenames.
All other information fields are the same as for the“Weighing” application (Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: “PcsWgt”and“RefPcs”activated(inthisorder).
“Nominal”: Specifiesthedesiredtargetpiececount(Section12.4.3).Thetargetpiececountisalsousedasthereferenceforthetolerances(asdescribedbelow).
“Abs/Diff”: Switchestheweightdisplaybetweenthenumberofpiecesthathavealreadybeenweighedandthenumberofpiecesstillneedingtobeweighedtoreachthetargetpiececount(Section12.4.3).
“+Tol”and“–Tol”: Specifiestheaccuracy(tolerances)forthepiececounting(Section12.4.3).
“Max n”: Specifiesthemaximumnumberofpiececountsinaseries(Section12.4.2).
All other function keys are identical to those for the“Weighing” application (Section7.2.2).
Factory setting: “PcsWgt”“FixPcs”,“VarPcs” and“Display” are activated (inthisorder).
The“PieceCounting”application
107
Inthethreesubmenuswhereyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheheaderlineofreports,theoptionsforreportsofindividualvalues,andtheoptionsforstatisticalreports,thereareadditionalsettingsavailableforpiecepiececountingwhicharedescribedbelow.
Note:Allotheritemsofinformationonthereportsarethesameasforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.7)andarenotlistedhere.
Report header line
Onthesecondpageofthissubmenuthereisanadditionalsettingforpiececounting:
“Nom, +/–Tol”: Reports thespecified targetpiececountand theselected tole-rances.
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(“PieceCounting”);theapplication-specificinforma-tionforpiececountingisnotactivated.
Theheaderlineisautomaticallyprintedifthefunctionkey“M+”ispressedtosavethefirstpiececountvalueofaseries.Theheaderlinecanalsobeprintedseparatelybypressingthe“Headerline”functionkey.
Reporting individual values
Thefirstandsecondpagesofthissubmenucontainthefollowingadditionalsettingsforpiececounting:
“Nom, +/–Tol”: Reportsthespecifiedtargetpiececountandtheselectedtoler-ances.
“RefPcs”: Reportstheselectedreferencepiececount.
“PcsWgt”: Reportsthespecifiedreferencepieceweight.
“NetPcs”: Reportsthedeterminednetpiececount.
Factory setting: “ID1”,“NetPcs”,and“Net”.
Individualvaluesofpiececountingseriesareprintedoutautomaticallyifthe“M+”functionkeyispressed.Anindividualvaluecanalsobeprintedoutsaparatelybypressingthe«F»key,inwhichcasenoitemcounterisprintedinfrontofthenetvalue.
12.3.6 Special report information for piece counting
12.3.5 Additional unit for piece countingInthemenusforthe“displayunit”and“infounit”,theunit“PCS”(pieces)isavailableinadditiontotheusualweighingunits(providedthatareferencepieceweightwasalreadydetermined).
Note:Whenyoudopiececounting,youdonothavetoexplicitlyselecttheunit“PCS”,becausethedisplayunitisalwaysautomaticallyswitchedto“PCS”whenthereferencepieceweightisdetermined.Afterthereferencepieceweighthasbeendetermined,youcanswitchbacktothedesiredunitatanytime.Theonlyexceptionisifyouhavealreadysavedavaluefromaseriesofpiececountsinthememory,inwhichcaseyoucanonlyswitchbackfrom“PCS”totheotherweighingunitsafteryouhaveclearedtheresults.
Factory unit: “g”(gram)for“Displayunit”and“Informationunit”.
The“PieceCounting”application
108
Reporting the result
Onthesecondandthirdpagesofthissubmenuyoucanspecirywhichadditionalinforma-tionitemsforpiececountingshouldbeincludedinthereportoftheresults:
“Max n”: Specifiedmaximumnumberofpiececountsinaseries.
“Nom, +/–Tol”: Specifiedtargetpiececountandselectedtolerances.
“>Tol+, <Tol–: Numberofpiececountsoutsidetheupperandlowertolerancelimitsrespecitvely.
“n”: Numberofpiececountsperformedinaseries.
“x”: Average(mean)piececountofallpiececountsinaseries.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standarddeviationasanabsoluteandpercentagevalue.
Note:Thesetwovaluesareonlyreportedifthememorycontainsatleast3values.Otherwisehorizontaldashesareprintedinsteadofthevalues.
“Min,Max, Diff.”: Lowestandhighestpiececountsdeterminedinthecurrentseriesandthedifferencebetweenthesetwopiececounts.
“Sum”: Accumulatedvalueofallsavedindividualweighingsinthecurrentdisplayunit.
“SumPcs”: Accumulatedpiececountofallsavedindividualpiececounts.
Factory setting: “n”,“x”,“s”,“s.rel”,“Min,Max,Diff.”,“Sum”,“SumPcs”,“Signature”,and“3blanklines”areactivated.
Thereportofresultscanbeprintedoutbyopeningtheresultswindowandthenpress-ingthe«F»key.Ifaspecificnumberofindividualcountshasbeendefinedforapiececountingseries(“Maxn”),thereportoftheresultsisprintedoutautomaticallyassoonastheresultofthelastpiececounthasbeentransferredtomemory.
YouwillfindanexampleofapiececountingreportinSection12.4.4.
12.4 Working with the “Piece Counting” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“PieceCounting”application.Itgoeswithoutsayingthatyoucanalsodetermineatare,changetheresolutionoftheweighingresult,workwithidentifications,etc.Sinceyoualreadyknowaboutthesepossibilitiesfromthe“Weighing”application(Section6.3),theyarenotexplainedagainhere.
12.4.1 Simple piece counting
Settings
Beforeyoucanperformasimplepiececount,youmustactivateatleastoneofthe3functionkeysshownatleft(Section12.3.3)sothatyoucandeterminethereference.The two informationfields“PcsWgt” (referencepieceweight)and“RefPcs” (referencepiececount)arealreadyactivatedatthefactory(Section12.3.4).
The“PieceCounting”application
109
Determining the reference
Placethedesirednumberofreferencepiecesontheweighingpan.Thebalanceusesthesereferencepiecestodeterminetheaverage(mean)pieceweight,whichservesasthebasisforpiececounting.
Whenyouhaveplacedontheweighingpanexactlythenumberofpieceswhichwasprogrammedforthe“FixPcs”functionkey(Section12.3.2),pressthisfunctionkey.(Theprogrammedreferencepiececountisdisplayedbelowthekey,e.g.“Fix10”).Assoonastheweighingresultisstable,thecalculatedaveragepieceweightisacceptedasthereference.Theinformationfieldsthendisplaytheaveragepieceweight(thenumberofdecimalplacesdependsonthemodel)andthereferencepiececount.
Ifyouhaveplacedontheweighingpanadifferentnumberofreferencepiecesthanthenumbercorrespondingtothe“FixPcs”key(e.g.32pieces),pressthe“VarPcs”(variablepiececount)functionkey.Aninputfieldappearsinwhichyoucanenterthenumberofpieces.
Afteryouconfirmthenumberofpieces,thebalancedeterminesthereference.Theinfor-mationfieldsthendisplaythereferencepiececountwhichwasenteredandtheaverage(mean)weightofthereferencepieces.
If the piece weight is known,youcanenteritdirectly.Todothis,pressthe“PcsWgt”functionkey.Aninputfieldappearsinwhichyoucanenterthepieceweightinthedesiredunit.
Sincethebalancedoesnothavetodetermineareferenceifthismethodisused,theresultofthepiececount(thenumberofpiecescurrentlyontheweighingpan)isdisplayedassoonasyouconfirmthepieceweight.Theinformationfieldsthendisplaythereferencepieceweightyouenteredandtherefer-encepiececount“1”(becausetheweightofonlyonepiecewasentered).
Performing the piece count
Afteryouhavedeterminedthereference,placethepiecesyouwishtocountontheweigh-ingpan.Thenumberofpiecesdeterminedappearsintheresultsdisplay.Note:Ifyouwishtoknowtheweightofthepiecesontheweighingpaninsteadofthenumber,pressthe“PCS”unitandselectthedesiredweighingunit.
Youcanprinttheindividualvaluewhichwasdeterminedbypressingthe«F»key.YouwillfindanexampleofareportinSection12.4.4.
The“PieceCounting”application
110
Settings
Soyoucantotalpiececountsandincludetheminstatistics,youmustactivateatleastoneofthe3functionskeysshownatleft(Section12.3.3),andatleastoneofthefunctionkeysforreferencedetermination(Section12.4.1).
Inaddition,werecommendyoualsotoactivatethetwofunctionkeysshownatleft.Thesekeysallowyoutoclearincorrectvalues(“CLLast”)andtospecifythenumberofpiececountsinaseries(“Maxn”).
Tomakeoptimaluseofthestatisticsfunctions,youshouldconnectaprintertoyourbal-ance.Ifnoprinterisconnected,werecommendyoutoactivatethethreemostimportantinformationfieldsforthestatisticsofyourapplication(e.g.“n”,“x”,and“s”,seeSection12.3.4).
Operating sequence
Tospecifythenumberofpiececountsforaseriesinadvance,youcanpressthe“Max n”functionkeyandenterthenumber(1...999).Afterthelastpiececount,theseriesisterminatedautomatically,theresultswindowopens,andtheresultsreportisprinted.Note:Thisfunctionkeycanonlybeactivatediftherearenovaluesinthestatistics.Ifyouenter0(zero)for“Max n”,theseriesisunlimited,andyoucanincludeupto999piececountsinthestatistics.
Ifyouareworkingwithaweighingcontainer,placeitonthepanandpressthe«H»keytotarethebalance.
Determine the referenceby thedesiredmethod(fixed referencepiececount,variablereferencepiececount,orinputofaknownpieceweight,seeSection12.4.1).
Performthefirstpiececountandpressthefunctionkey“M+”toincludetheresultinthestatistics.Assoonastheresultisstable(horizontaldashesdisappear),itisincludedinthestatistics.Thereportheaderlineisprinted,followedbytheindividualvalueofthecurrentpiececount(Section12.3.6).
Removethepiecesofthefirstpiececountfromtheweighingpan.Performtherespectivepiececountsoftheseries.Confirmeachresultwiththe“M+”functionkey.Removethepiecesandtarethebalance.Eachtimearesultisincludedinthestatistics,itisprintedautomatically.
Notes:
– Ifyoupress the“M+” functionkeywhennoweightchangehasoccurred,anerrormessageappears.Thisistomakesureyoudonotrecordthesameresulttwicebymistake.
12.4.2 Totaling piece counts and including them in statistics
The“PieceCounting”application
111
– Ifyousavedanincorrectpiececountingresultbymistake,youcanremoveitfromthestatisticswiththe“CL Last”functionkey.However,thisisonlypossibleforthelastresultthatwassaved.The“CL Last”functionkeyisonlyactiveiftherearevaluessavedinmemory;otherwisethekeyisdimmedandcannotbeoperated.Afteryouhaveclearedaresult,thekeyisinactivatedandonlyfunctionsagainafteryouhaveincludedthenextresultinthestatistics.
Whenyouhaveperformedallthepiececountsintheseries,pressthe“Result”functionkey. (Thekeycanonlybeoperated if thereare values in thememory;otherwise it isdimmedandcannotbeoperated).Thistemporarilyterminatestheseriesofpiececountsandopenstheresultswindow.(Youcan,however,continuetheseriesatanytime.)Note:Ifyouspecifiedthenumberofpiececountsintheserieswiththe“Max n”functionkey,theresultswindowopensautomaticallyafterthelastpiececountandindicatesthatthemaximumnumberofpiececountshasbeenreached.
Theresultswindowshowstheresultsof thecountingseries,withthe informationyouselectedtobeincludedinthereport(seeSection12.3.6).PleaserefertotheinstructionsinSection12.4.4regardingtheunits,resolution,andaccuracyofthedisplayedvalues.
Iftheresultswindowspreadsoverseveraldisplaypages,youcanusethearrowkeystomovebetweenthepages.Youcanprinttheresultsreportbypressingthe«F»key.
Youwillfindanexampleofacompletereportwithall thestatisticalvaluesinSection12.4.4.
Whenyouhavedefinitelycompletedthecurrentpiececountingseriesandwanttoclearthememoryreadyforanewseries,pressthe“CL Result”functionkey.Forsafety,youwillbeaskedtoconfirmthatyoureallywanttodeletethestatistics.Note:Ifthekeyisshowndimmed,therearenovaluesinthestatistics.
The“PieceCounting”application
112
12.4.3 Counting to a target valueThe“PieceCounting”applicationhasadditionalfunctionswhichmakeiteasierforyoutocounttoaspecifiedtargetvalue.Youcanusethesefunctionsforindividualpiececountsaswellasforseriesofpiececountswithstatistics.Inthefollowingdescriptionitisassumedthatthereferenceforthepiececounthasalreadybeendetermined.
Settings
Beforeyoucanentera target valueand theassociated tolerances, the functionkeysshownatleftmustbeactivated(Section12.3.3).Ifyouwantthespecifiedvaluestobeshowninthedisplay,youmustalsoactivatetheinformationfieldswiththesamename(Section12.3.4).
Wealsorecommendyoutoactivatethe“Abs/Diff”functionkey,soyoucanswitchbe-tweenthequantityalreadyweighedandthequantitythatstillneedstobeweighedtoreachthetargetvalue.
Operating sequence
Note:Ifthestatisticsalreadycontainvalues,thefunctionkeysforenteringthetargetvalueandtolerancesareinactive.Inthiscase,youmustclearthestatisticswiththe“CL Result”functionkeybeforeyoucanspecifythetargetvalueandtolerances.
Pressthe“Nominal”functionkey.Typeinthedesiredvalue.Checktheweighingunitwhichisdisplayedtotherightofthetargetvalue.Presstheweighingunittodisplaytheunitsavailableforselection,whichinclude“PCS”(pieces).Note:Theunitsarenotconvertedautomatically,i.e.ifyouhaveenteredavalueinoneunit,thevalueremainsthesameevenifyouchangetheunit.Whenyouhaveenteredthevalue,press“OK”toactivatethetargetvalue.
Tospecifyhowaccuratelyyouwanttocount,youcanusethe“+Tol”and“–Tol”functionkeys.Theinputwindowisthesameasfortargetvalue.Bothtolerancevaluesaresetto2.5%atthefactory.Whenyouhaveenteredthedesiredpercentagevalues,press“OK”toactivatethetolerance.Piececountswhichlieoutsidethetolerancesarespeciallymarkedwith“>T”or“<T”inthereportofindividualvalues.
Whenyouhaveenteredthetargetvalueandtolerances,thetolerancemarksforthe“Smart-Trac”graphicalweighingaidappearinthedisplay.Thetolerancemarksmakeweighingtothetargetvalueeasier.Youcanweighyoursamplesroughlyuntilthelowertolerancevalueisreached,andthendispensefinelytothetargetvalue.
The“PieceCounting”application
113
12.4.4 Example of a piece counting report with statistical valuesShownatleftisanexampleofareportforpiececountingwithstatisticalvalues.Thevaluesshownintheheaderline,asindividualvalues,andasresultsdependontheindividualreportsettingsyoumade(Section12.3.6).
Onlythespecific items of information relating to piece counting, andtheassociatedstatisticalvaluescontainedintheexamplereport,areexplainedbelow.Youwillfindex-planationsoftheotherinformationitemsinthereportinSection7.2.7.
“Nominal”: Thespecifiedtargetvalue(inthisexampleasnumberofpieces).
“+Tol”: Specifiedplustolerance(inpercent).
“–Tol”: Specifiedminustolerance(inpercent).
“RefPcs”: Numberofreferencepiecesforeachpiececount.
“PcsWgt”: Referencepieceweightforeachpiececount.
“NetPcs”: Netnumberofpiecesdeterminedforeachpiececount.
“1”...“3”: Sequencenumbersandnetvaluesoftheindividualpiececountsintheseries.Anypiececountswhichlieoutsidethetolerancesarespeciallymarkedwith“>T”or“<T”(inthisexample,thesecondcount).Note:Theresultsaredisplayedinthecurrentdisplayunit,whichneednotnecessarilybe“PCS”.
“Max n”: Specifiednumberofpiececountsintheseries.
“>T+”,“<T–: Number of piece counts in the series which were outside therespective tolerances. In thisexample, the resultof thesecondpiececountwasbelowthelowertolerancelimit.
“n”: Numberofpiececountsrecorded.
“x”: Average(mean)piececountofallrecordedcounts.Thevalueisreportedinthecurrentdisplayunit,inthiscase“PCS”.Theresolutionofthereportedvalueishigherthanthatoftheindividualmeasuredvaluewiththehighestresolution.
“s”: Standarddeviationoftheseries.Thevalueisreportedinthecur-rentdisplayunit,inthiscase“PCS”.Thesamecommentregardingresolutionappliesasfor“x”(seeabove).
“s.rel”: Relativestandarddeviationoftheseries(inpercent).Thevalueisalwaysreportedwith2decimalplaces.
“Min”: Lowestvaluedeterminedinthecurrentseries.
“Max”: Highestvaluedeterminedinthecurrentseries.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenthehighestandlowestvaluesinthecurrentseries.Thevalueisreportedinthecurrentdisplayunit,inthiscase“PCS”.
“Sum”: Accumulatedresultofall individualweighingsthatweresaved.Note:Theresultisshowninthecurrentdisplayunitwhichneednotnecessarilybe“PCS”.
“SumPcs”: Totalpiececount(accumulatedresultofallindividualpiececountsofaseriesthatweresaved).
---- Piececounting -----1.Sep 2004 17:34Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890 Terminal SNR: 1234567890Nominal 110.00 PCS +Tol 2.50 % -Tol 2.50 % RefPcs 10 PCS PcsWgt 24.688 g NetPcs 110 PCS 1 110 PCS RefPcs 10 PCS PcsWgt 24.688 g NetPcs 105 PCS 2<T 105 PCS RefPcs 10 PCS PcsWgt 24.688 g NetPcs 109 PCS 3 109 PCS Max n 3 >T+ 0 <T- 1 n 3 x 108.000 PCS s 2.646 PCS s.rel 2.45 % Min 105 PCS Max 110 PCS Diff 5 PCS Sum 324.00 PCS SumPcs 324 PCS
Signature
........................
Important information for interpreting the reported results
Thevaluesfor“x”and“s”arecalculatedresultswhicharedisplayedwithahigherresolutionthantheindividualmeasurementvalues.Withsmallmeasurementseries(<approx.10measurementvalues),andmeasurementserieswhichhavesmalldeviations,thesig-nificanceofthelastdecimalplacecannotbeguaranteed.YouwillfindinformationabouttheformulasusedtocalculatethesevaluesinSection8.4.4.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
114
I
J
13 The “Dynamic Weighing” application (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
InthisSectionyouwillbeintroducedtothe“DynamicWeighing”application.Youwillfindpracticalinformationaboutworkingwiththisap-plicationandaboutthedifferentsettings.(Youwillfindinformationaboutthenon-application-specificsystemsettingsinSection5).
13.1 Introduction to the “Dynamic Weighing” applicationThe“DynamicWeighing”applicationallowsefficient,convenient,andaccurateweighingofunstableweighingobjects(e.g.animals).
Theapplicationsupportstheuserofachip scannerforfastanderror-freeidentificationofmeasurementresultstoindividualtestani-mals.Youcanconnectthechipscannerlikeabarcodereaderandconfigureitinthesystemsettings(Section6.6,“Barcode”).Intheapplication-dependentsettingsyouspecifyhowthedatafromthescannershouldbeprocessed.Thisisdescribedinthe“Weighing”application,Section7.2.11.
Manyoftheapplication-dependentsettingsareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”application.However,additionalsettingsareavail-abletoyoufordynamicweighing.Inthedescriptionsthatfollow,onlythosesettingsareexplainedindetailwhicharedifferentfromthe“Weighing”application.
13.2 Selecting the application
13.3 Settings for the “Dynamic Weighing” ApplicationFordynamicweighingyouhavevariousspecificsettingsavailablewhichyoucanusetoadapttheapplicationtoyourneeds.
13.3.1 Overview
Ifthe“DynamicWeighing”applicationisnotalreadyactive,firstpressthe«I»key.Intheselectionwindow,touchthesymbolfortheapplication.
Afteryouhaveselectedtheapplication,thedisplayshownatleftappears.Someofthespecialinformationfieldsfordynamicweighingareactivatedatthefactory.HowyoucanadapttheseandothersettingstoyourneedsisdescribedintheSectionsthatfollow.
Note: If the information fieldsarenotdisplayedon yourbalance,press the“Display”functionkeytoreducethesizeoftheweightdisplayandtherebymakeroomtodisplaytheinformationfields.
Theapplication-dependentsettingscanbeaccessedwiththe«J»key.Whenthiskeyispressed,thefirstof5menupagesappears.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
115
Withonlyafewexceptions,thesettingsavailableinthe“DynamicWeighing”applicationareidenticaltothoseofthe“Weighing”ap-plication(Section7.2).Onlythesettingsthataredifferentaredescribedbelow.Thesesettingsarecontainedinthefollowingmenusonthefirst4menupages:
“Function Keys”:Additional functionkeysareavailable fordynamicweighing.
“Data Acquisition”:Adaptationoftheapplicationtotheweigh-ingobject.
“Start Mode”:Settingsforthestartoftheweighing.
“Beep”:Activates/deactivatesthebeepthatsignifiescompletionofaweighing.
“AutoTare”:Activates/deactivates the automatic tarefunction.
Thefollowingspecialfunctionkeysareavailablefordynamicweighing:
“Start”: Youcanusethisfunctionkeytostartamanual weighingcycle.Ifthe“automaticstart”functionisactivated(Section13.3.4),thisfunctionkey isnot required. If theautomaticstart functionhasbeenswitchedoff,youmustactivatethisfunctionkey,otherwisenoweighingscanbeperformed!
“Result”: Openstheresultswindow.Thisfunctionkeyisonlyrequiredifthestatisticsfunctionhasbeenactivated(Section13.3.12).
“CL Result”: Clearsthestatisticsofaweighingseries.Thiskeyisonlyrequiredifthestatisticsfunctionhasbeenactivated.
“Info field”: Additionalinformationfieldsareavailablefordynamicweighing.
“Reports”: Additionalinformationisavailablefordynamicweighingreports.
“Single Value Print”: Activates/deactivatesautomaticprintingofindividualweighingresults.
“Output channel selection”: Selectsthedestinationfortheoutputdata(hostand/orprinter).
“Data output format”: Formattingoftheoutputdata.
“Statistics”: Activates/deactivatesthestatisticsfunction.
Pleasenotetatincontrasttothe“Weighing”application, nofreeunitscanbedefined.InthefollowingSectionsyouwillbegivenadetailedintroductiontothespecificsettingsforthe“DynamicWeighing”application.
13.3.2 Special function keys for dynamic weighing
The“DynamicWeighing”application
116
13.3.3 Adapting the application to the dynamic behavior of the weighing materialYoucanusethesettingsinthe“DataAcquisition”menutoadapttheapplicationtothebehavioroftheweighingobjectandtherebyoptimizethespeedofaresultdetermination.Thefollowingsettingsareavailable:
Withthe“Dynamic Behavior”setting,thebalancedeterminesthereleaseoftheweighingresultbasedonyourspecifications(filtersettings):
“Stable”: Thissettingissuitableforrelativelystableweighingobjects.
“Standard”: Thissettingissuitablefornormalweighingobjects.
“Unstable”: Thissettingissuitableforunstableweighingobjects.
Alternatively,the“Time Interval”settingallowsyoutodefineafixedamountoftime(1...99seconds)untiltheweighingresultisreleased.Thiscanimpairprecision,butitcanbepracticalwhentheabovefiltersettingsresultinlongmeasuringtimesinthecaseofextremelyunstableweighingmaterials,orwhenyouhavetoconcludeyourmeasurementswithinacertainamountoftime.
Factory setting: “TimeInterval”=“5sec”.
13.3.4 Settings for the start of weighingInthe“StartMode”menu,youmustspecifyhowaweighingcycleshouldbestarted.
“Step procedure”: No automatic start. Each measurement cycle must be startedmanuallyand the“Start” functionkeymustbeactive (Section13.3.2).Loadingandremovingtheobjectthatisbeingweighedmustbeconfirmed.
“AutoStart”: A measurement cycle is started automatically as soon as theweighingobjectisplacedonthebalancewhichisheavierthanthespecifiedminimumweight.Tochangetheminimumweight,pressthecorrespondingbutton,andanumericinputfieldwillappearintowhichyoucantypetheminimumweightvalueingrams.Thepurposeoftheminimumweightvalueistocheckwhetherornotthereisaweighingobjectonthebalance.Definetheminimumweightvaluesothatitislessthantheweightofyourlightestweigh-ingobject,butnotsolowthatevenslightsoilingoftheweighingpan,orvibrations,triggeraweighing.
Note:Ifthe“AutoTare”function(Section13.3.6)isactivated,thedisplayisautomaticallyresettozeroaftereachweighingiscom-pleted.
“CL Last”: Deletesthelastmeasurementvaluewhichwasincludedinthestatistics.Thisfunctionkeyisonlyrequiredifthestatisticsfunctionhasbeenactivated.
Allotherfunctionkeysarethesameasforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.2).
Factory setting: “ID”,“1/10d”and“Display”activated(inthisorder).Nospecificfunctionkeysfordynamicweighingareactivated.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
117
13.3.6 Settings for the automatic tare functionInthismenuitemyoucanspecifywhetherthebalanceshouldbeautomaticallyresettozerowhenrequired(seealsoSection12.4.1and12.4.2).
“On”: Whentheweighingobjectisremoved,thedisplayisautomaticallyresettozeroandthebalanceisimmediatelyreadyforthenextdynamicweighing.
“Off”: Thedisplaymustbemanuallyresettozerowiththe«G»or«H»keybeforeanewweighingisperformed.
Factory setting: “On”(automatictarefunctionactivated)
13.3.5 Settings for the beep at the end of the measurement cycleInthe“Beep”menuyoucanspecifywhetherabeepshouldindicatetheendofameasurementcycle.
“Off”: Thereisnobeepattheendofadynamicweighing.
“On”: Assoonastheresultofadynamicweighingisready,abeepisemitted.Ifyouswitchthebeepon,afteryouhavestartedaweigh-ingcycleyoucandoanotherjobuntilthebeeptellsyouthattheresultisready.
Factory setting: “On”(beepswitchedon)
“Quick procedure”: No automatic start: Each measurement cycle must be startedmanually andthe “Start”functionkeymustbeactive(Section13.3.2).Differentthanthe“Stepprocedure”,loadingtheobjectbe-ingweigheddoesnothavetobeconfirmed,andthemeasurementstartsimmediatelywhenyoupressthe“Start”key.Unloadingtheobjectbeingweighedalsodoesnothavetobeconfirmed.
The“AutoTare”functionisinactive;ifnecessary,weighingcontainersmustbetaredmanuallybeforestartingthemeasurement.
Toensurebackwardcompatibilitywithearlierproducts,onlytheweightvaluesthataredeterminedarerecordedintheprotocol,irrespectiveoftheselectedprotocolsettings.Thesettingsforfor-mattingtheoutputdataareignored.Thevaluesareprotocolledinafixedformatandthesymbol“*”isinsertedbeforeeachvalue.
Factory setting: “AutoStart”(minimumweight5.00g)
The“DynamicWeighing”application
118
13.3.7 Special information fields for dynamic weighingInthemenuforinformationfieldsthefollowingspecialsettingsfordynamicweighingareavailable:
“AutoStart”: Indicateswhetherthe“AutoStart”functionisactive(Section13.3.4).With this functionactivated, theassociatedminimumweight isdisplayed.
“Status”: Current statusof theapplication (forexplanations, seeSection13.4.1).
The following informationfieldsareonly relevant if thestatistics function isactivated(Section13.3.12):
“n”: Numberofsamplesweighed.
“x”: Average(mean)weightofallsamples.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standarddeviationasabsoluteandpercentagevalue.
“Min”and“Max”: Lowestandhighestdeterminedweightvalueofthecurrentmea-surementseries.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenthelowestandthehighestweightvalue.
“Sum”: Accumulatedweightofallindividualweighings.
Allotherinformationfieldsareidenticaltothoseforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.3).
Factory setting: “AutoStart”,“Status”,and“ID1”activated(inthisorder).
13.3.8 Special report information for dynamic weighing Inthethreesubmenuswhereyoucanspecifytheoptionsfortheheaderlineofreports,theoptionsforindividualvalues,andtheoptionsfortheresults,thereareadditionalset-tingsavailablewhicharedescribedbelow.
Note:Allother itemsof informationinthereportsarethesameasfor the“Weighing”application(Section8.2.8)andarenotlistedhere.
Report header line
Theinformationavailableinthereportisidenticaltothatforthe“Weighing”application(Section7.2.7).
Factory setting: “Appl.Name”(“DynamicWeighing”)and“Date/Time”.
Iftheheaderlinehasbeendefinedasacomponentoftheweighingreport,itisprintedautomatically(see“Reportingindividualvalues”onthenextpage).Theheaderlinecanalsobeprintedoutseparatelybypressingthe“Headerline”functionkey.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
119
13.3.9 Automatic or manual reporting of individual valuesInthe“Printsinglevalue”menuyouspecifywhethertheindividualvalues(Section13.3.8)shouldbeprintedoutautomaticallyormanually.
“Automatic”: Areportofindividualvaluesisprintedoutautomaticallyaftereachsuccessfullycompletedmeasurement.
“Manual”: As soon as the result of a dynamic weighing is displayed, theindividualvaluereportcanbeprintedoutwiththe«F»key.
Factory setting: “Automatic”
Reporting individual values
Inthissubmenuthefollowingspecialsettingsfordynamicweighingareavailable:
“Sample”: Reportsthenetweightvalueofthecurrentweighing.
Factory setting: “Sample”.
Anindividualvalueisprintedouteitherbypressingthe«F»keywiththeresultwindowopen,orautomatically(seeSection13.3.9).
Footer line of the report
Onthesecondandthirdpagesof thissubmenuyoucanspecifyadditionalstatisticalinformationwhichshouldbeprintedout in thefooterof theweighingreportafter theresults(individualvalues):
“n”: Numberofsamplesweighed.
“x”: Average(mean)weightofallsamples.
“s”and“s.rel”: Standarddeviationasabsoluteandpercentagevalue.
Note:Thesetwovaluesareonlyreportedifthestatisticscontainatleast3values,otherwisehorizontallinesareprintedinsteadofthevalues.
“Min,Max, Diff.”: Lowestandhighestweightvaluesdeterminedinthecurrentmea-surementseriesandthedifferencebetweenthesevalues.
“Sum”: Accumulatedweightofallindividualvaluessaved.
Factory setting: “Signature”;nospecificinformationitemsfordynamicweighingareactivated.
Thefooterlineisprintedoutwhenthe“Footer”functionkeyispressed.
YouwillfindanexampleofadynamicweighingreportinSection13.4.4.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
120
13.3.10 Selecting the destination for the output dataInthe“Outputchannelselection”menuyoucanspecifytheinstrumentstowhichtheweighingresultsshouldbetransmitted.
“Printer”: Thedataaretransmittedtotheprinteraccordingtotheselectedprotocolsettings(Section13.3.8).
“Host”: Theweighingresultsaretransmittedtothecomputeraccordingtothesettingsforformattingtheoutputdata(Section13.3.11).
“Printer + Host”: Thedataare transmitted toboth theprinter and thecomputer(accordingtotheprotocolsettingsandthesettingsforformattingtheoutputdata).
Factory setting: “Printer”
Note: Ifyouselectedthe“Quickprocedure”settingforthestartoftheweighing(Section13.3.4),onlytheweightvaluesthataredeter-minedareprotocolledontheprinter,irrespectiveoftheprotocolsettings that were selected. In the data output to the host, thesettingsforformattingtheoutputdataareignored.Thevaluesareprotocolledinafixedformat,andthe“*”symbolisinsertedbeforeeachvalue.
13.3.11 Formatting the output data
In the“Dataoutput format”menu,youcanspecifyhow theweighing results thatareoutputtothehostcomputershouldbeformatted.Thiscanbenecessaryifyouoperateyourbalancetogetherwithotherinstruments,programs,orperipheraldevicesthatrequireaparticulardataformat.
Atthefactory,dataoutputissettoastandard format.
Example(21.45g):
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
d w N 2 1 . 4 5 g CR LF
Theidentifier“dw”indicatesthatthedatarecordrelatestothecalculatedweightvalueofadynamicweighing,“N”standsforanetweightvalue.Theweightvalueisfollowedbytheend-of-linecharacterthatwasdefinedforthehost(Section6.6).
Ifyouwanttochangetheoutputformat,activate“Customise”andthentouch“Define”key.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
121
Thismenucontainssettingsforthefollowingdatafields:
– DWidentifier
– Netweightsymbol
– Weightvalue
– Weightunit
Intheoutputdata,thesefieldsarealwaysseparatedbyaspacecharacter.Thecompletedatarecordisterminatedwiththeend-of-linecharactersthatweredefinedforthehost(Section6.6).
Thesettingsfortheindividualdatafieldsareexplainedbelow.
DW identifier
Inthestandardoutputformat,theweightvaluesarealwaysprecededbytheidentifier“dw”(“dynamicweighing”)whichindicatesthattheweighingresultiscalculatedfromseveralindividualmeasurements.Inthismenu,youcanactivateanddeactivate(“Off”)thisfunction,selectthesymboltobeused(“*”or“dw”),andalsospecifythefieldlength(1–10characters).Theidentifierisaligendright-justifiedinthefield.
Factory setting: Identifierdeactivated(“Off”). Fieldlength2characters.
Net weight symbol
Inthestandardoutputformat,netweightsareidentifiedwith“N”.Inthismenuyoucanactivateanddeactivatethisfunctionandalsodefinethefieldlength(1–10characters).Thenetsymbolisalignedleft-justifiedinthefield.Note:Ifthebalancehasnotbeentared,thenetsymbolisnottransmitted,andspacecharacterscorrespondingtotheselectedfieldlengtharetransmittedinstead.
Factory setting: Netweightsymboldeactivated(“Off”). Fieldlength5characters.
Format of the weight value
Forformattingtheweightvalue,thefollowingoptionsareavailable:
“Field length”: Total length of the data field for the weight value includingsign, decimal point, and decimal places (1 – 20 characters).Note:Irrespectiveofyoursetting,enoughcharactersarealwaysoutput for theweightvaluethat isdisplayedontheterminal tobetransmitted.Theweightvalueisoutputright-justified.Factory setting:10.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
122
“No. of dec. digits”: Numberofdecimalplaces(0–6characters).Ifthevaluethatissetislessthanthenumberofdecimalplacesdisplayedontheterminal,around-edvaluewiththeselectednumberofdecimalplacesistrasnmitted.Factory setting:Max.numberofdecimalplacesofthebalance.
“Sign”: Whensetto“Always”,theweightvalueisalwaysprecededbyaplusorminussign.Ifyouselect“Neg. values”,negativevalueswillbeprecededbyaminussign,butpositivevalueswillbetransmittedwithoutasign.Factory setting:“Neg.values”.
“Sign position”: Youcanusethissettingtospecifywhetherthesignshouldbeimmedi-atelyinfrontoftheweightvalue(rightjustified)orwithagapinbetween.Factory setting:Rightjustified(immediatelyinfrontoftheweightvalue).
Field for the weight unit
Inthestandardoutputformat,eachwightvalueisoutputwiththecorrespondingweightunit(correspondingtothecurrentdisplayunit).Inthismenuyoucanchoosewhetherweightunitsshouldbetrasnmittedwithorwithoutunitandalsospecifythefieldlenghtfor theweightunit(1–5characters). Irrespectiveofyoursettingfor thefield length,enoughdecimalplaceswillbeoutputfortheweightvaalueshownonthedisplaytobecompletelytransmitted.Theweightunitisoutputleft-justified(separatedfromtheweightvaluebyaspacecharacter.
Factory setting: Outputofthweightunitisactivated. Fieldlength3characters.
13.3.12 Activate or deactivate statisticsInthe“Statistics”menuyoucanspecifywhethertheresultsoftheindividualweighingsshouldbeincludedinthestatistics.
“Off”: Theresultsoftheweighingsarenotincludedinthestatistics.
“On”: Theresultsofthedynamicweighingsareincludedinthestatisticsandcanbesubsequentlyevaluated.YouwillfindinformationaboutuseofthestatisticsfunctioninSection13.4.3.
Factory setting: “Off”(statisticsdeactivated)
The“DynamicWeighing”application
123
13.4 Working with the “Dynamic Weighing” applicationInthisSectionyouwilllearnhowtoworkwiththe“DynamicWeighing”application.Itgoeswithoutsayingthatyoucanchangetheresolutionoftheweighingresult(e.g.tospeeduptheweighingoperation),workwithidentifications,etc.Sinceyoualreadyknowaboutthesepossibilitiesfromthe“Weighing”application(Section7.3),theyarenotexplainedagainhere.
13.4.1 Dynamic weighing with automatic start
Settings
Toperformadynamicweighingwithautomaticstart,youmusthaveactivatedthe“AutoStart”functionandspecifiedthecorrespondingminimumweight(Section13.3.4).Nospecialfunctionkeysneedbeactivated,butwerecommendyoutoswitchonthe“ID”functionkeyifyouwanttoassignanidentificationtoeachsample.Bothoftherequiredinformationfields,“AutoStart”and“Status”arealreadyactivatedatthefactory(Section13.3.7).
Performing the weighing
Makesurethatthe“Status”informationfieldisdisplaying“Ready”.Ifitisdisplaying“Not ready”,waituntilthedisplayisstableandthestatuschangesto“Ready”.If“Please Zero”isdisplayed,pressthe«G»key.
Ifyouworkwithaweighingcontainer,placethecontainerontheweighingpanandpressthe«H»keytotarethebalance.Ifyouwanttogivetheweighingobjectanidentifica-tion,pressthe“ID”functionkeyandenterthedesiredidentification.(Alternativelyyoucanreadtheidentificationinwithachipscanner.)
Placetheweighingobjectonthebalance.Theweightoftheweighingobjectmustbegreaterthantheweightshowninthe“AutoStart”informationfield,otherwisetheweighingcyclewillnotstartautomatically.Aftertheautomaticstart,thewindowshownatleftappears.
Whentheweighingisfinished,theresultisdisplayedalongwithaprompttoremovetheweighingobject.
Ifautomaticreportingof the individualvalues isactivated(Section13.3.9), theresultoftheweighingisprintedoutautomatically.Toprinttheweighingresultmanually,pressthe«F»key.
Whenyouremovetheweighingobject(andprovidedthe“AutoTare”functionisactivated)thedisplayisautomaticallyresettozero.Thebalanceisthenreadyforthenextweighing.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
124
13.4.2 Dynamic weighing with manual start
Settings
Toperformadynamicweighingwithmanualstart,the“Step procedure”or“Quick pro-cedure”functionmustbeactivated(Section13.3.4).The“Start”functionkeymustalsobeactivated.Bothoftheinformationfields“AutoStart”and“Status”areactivatedatthefactory(Sec-tion13.3.7).Note:The“Status”informationfieldisnotneededfordynamicweighingwithmanualstartsincetheapplicationisalways“Ready”.
Performing the weighing
Ifyouworkwithaweighingcontainer,placethecontainerontheweighingpanandpressthe«H»keytotarethebalance.Ifyouwanttogivetheweighingobjectanidentifica-tion,pressthe“ID”functionkeyandenterthedesiredidentification.(Alternatively,youcanreadtheidentificationinwithachipscanner).
– Ifyouselectedthe“Step procedure”function: Pressthe“Start”functionkey.Ifthe“AutoTare”functionisactivated,thedisplayisau-
tomaticallysettozero.Youwillthenbepromptedtoplacetheweighingobjectonthebalance.Whenyouhavedonethis,pressthe“OK”buttontostartthemeasurement.
– Ifyouselectedthe“Quick procedure”function: Placetheobjecttobeweighedonthebalanceandpressthe“Start”functionkey.The
measurementstartsimmediately.
Whentheweighingisfinished,theresultisdisplayedalongwithaprompttoremovetheweighingobject.
Ifautomaticreportingofindividualvaluesisactivated(Section13.3.9),theresultoftheweighingisprintedoutautomatically.Toprintouttheweighingresultmanually,pressthe«F»key.
Removetheweighingobjectandconfirmwith“OK”(notnecessaryforthe“Quickproce-dure”function).Thebalanceisthenreadyforthenextweighing.
13.4.3 Recording statistics of dynamic weighingSettings
To record statistics of dynamic weighing, the statistics function must be activated (Sec-tion13.3.12).Youshouldalsoactivatethefunctionkeysshownatleft(Section13.3.2).
Using the statistics
Withthestatisticsfunctionactivated,allweighingresultsareautomaticallytransferredtothestatistics(upto999values).Ifanincorrectresultisincludedinthestatisticsbymistake,youcanremoveitwiththe“CL Last”functionkey.However,youcanonlyremovethe last result thatwas included.Afteryouhave removed the incorrect result, thekeybecomesinactiveandonlyfunctionsagainafterthenextresulthasbeentransferredtothestatistics.
The“DynamicWeighing”application
125
13.4.4 Example of a dynamic weighing reportShownatleftisanexampleofareportofstatisticalvaluesforaseriesofdynamicweigh-ings.Thevalueswhichareincludedintheheaderline,asindividualvalues,andinthefooter,dependonyourindividualreportsettings(Section13.3.8).
Thefollowingexplanationsrelateonlytothespecific items of information for dynamic weighing andtheassociatedstatisticalvaluescontainedintheexamplereportshownatleft.YouwillfindexplantationsoftheotherinformationitemsinthereportinSection7.2.7:
“dw”: Resultsoftheindividualweighings(“dw”=dynamicweighing).
“n”: Numberofindividualweighingsincludedinthestatistics.
“x”: Average(mean)weightofallweighingsincludedinthestatistics.Themeanisreportedwitharesolution10timeshigherthanfortheindividualmeasurements.
“s”: Standarddeviationof theseries.Thesamecomment regardingtheresolutionappliesasfor“x”above.
“s.rel”: Relativestandarddeviationoftheseries(inpercent).Thevalueisalwaysreportedwith2decimalplaces.
“Min”: Lowestvaluedeterminedinthecurrentmeasurementseries.
“Max”: Highestvaluedeterminedinthecurrentmeasurementseries.
“Diff”: Differencebetweenthelowestandhighestvaluesinthecurrentmeasurementseries.
“Sum”: Accumulatedweightofallindividualmeasurementswhichhavebeensaved.
Important information for interpretation of the reported results
Thevaluesof“x”and“s”arecalculatedresultswhichareshownwithahigherresolutionthantheindividualvalues.Forsmallseriesofmeasurements(<approx.10measurementvalues),andmeasurementserieswithsmalldeviations,thesignificanceofthelastdecimalplacecannotbeguaranteed.YouwillfindtheformulasusedforcalculatingthesevaluesinSection8.4.4.
--- Dynamic Weighing ---31.Aug 2004 15:47Balance Type XS6002SXWeighBridge SNR: 1234567890 Terminal SNR: 1234567890
dw 30.61 g dw 31.34 g dw 30.65 g dw 30.21 g dw 31.06 g
n 5 x 30.774 g s 0.437 g s.rel 1.42 % Min 30.21 g Max 31.34 g Diff 1.13 g Sum 153.87 g
Signature
........................
Youcanpressthe“Result”functionkeytoopenthestatisticswindow.(Thekeyisonlyavailableiftherearevaluesinthestatistics,otherwiseitisshowndimmedandcannotbeoperated.)
Youcanprint thestatisticsbypressing the«F»key.Youwillfindexplanationsof theindividualvaluesinSection13.4.4.
Ifyouwanttoterminatethecurrentweighingseriesandclearthestatisticsreadyforanewseries,pressthe“CL Result”functionkey.Forsafety,youwillbeaskedforconfirma-tionbeforethestatisticsarefinallydeleted.Note:Ifthekeyisshowndimmed,therearenovaluesinthestatistics.
The“LabXClient”application
126
14 The application “LabX Client” (XS-Ex2modelsonly)
Thissectionprovidesanintroductiontothe“LabXClient”application.Itprovidesinformationonstartingtheapplicationandthesettingoptions(forinformationonnon-application-specificsystemsettings,seesection6).
14.1 Introduction to the “LabX Client” applicationThe“LabXClient”applicationregistersyourbalanceasaclientinthe“LabX balance” PC application (“LabX light balance” or “LabX pro balance”).“LabXbalance”enablesthedefinitionofcompletedialog-controlledworkprocessesforthebalance,andcanbeusedtostoreandmanagemeasuredvaluesandadditionaldatainadatabaseonthePC.
Assoonasyouhavestartedtheapplication,thebalanceestablishescontactwith“LabXbalance”andfollowingsuccessfullogon,thePCapplicationassumescontrolofthebalance.Thebalancescreenthendisplaystheusernavigationfor“LabXbalance”.
The “LabX balance” PC software is not covered in these instructions. For more information on working with this software, see the separate operating instructions for “LabX balance”.
Sinceyourbalanceiscontrolledasa“LabXClient”bythePCsoftware,“LabXClient”onlyhasafewapplication-specificsettings.
14.2 Selecting the applicationIfthe“LabXClient”applicationisnotalreadyactive,pressthe«I»key.Choosetheiconfortheapplicationintheselectionwindow.
Oncetheapplicationhasbeenselected,thebalancetriestoestablishcontactwiththe“LabXbalance”softwareonthePC.Iflogonissuccessful,theusernavigationfor“LabXbalance”isdisplayed.For all further instructions, refer to the operating instructions for “LabX balance”.
I
Softwareupdates
127
15 Software updatesMETTLERTOLEDOiscontinuouslyimprovingitssoftwareforthebenefitofcustomers.Sothatyou,thecustomer,canbenefitquicklyandeasilyfromfurtherdevelopments,METTLERTOLEDOmakesthelatestsoftwareversionsavailableontheinternet.ThesoftwaremadeavailableontheinternethasbeendevelopedbyMettler-ToledoGmbHusingprocessesthatmeettheguidelinesofISO9001.Mettler-ToledoGmbHdoesnot,however,acceptliabilityforconsequencesthatmightarisefromusingthesoftware.
15.1 Operating principleYouwillfindalltherelevantinformationandupdatesforyourbalanceontheMETTLERTOLEDOwebsiteatthefollowingaddress:
www.mt.com/balance-support
Werecommendthatyoucreateabookmarkforthisaddressinyourwebbrowser,sothatyoucanaccessthesitedirectlyinfuture.
Thebalancesoftwareisloadedontoyourcomputeralongwiththeso-called“e-LoaderII”.Youcanusethisprogramtodownloadthesoftwaretothebalance.The“e-LoaderII”canalsosavethesettingsinyourbalancebeforethenewsoftwareisdownloadedtoit.Youcanreloadthesavedsettingsintothebalanceafterthesoftwaredownloading.
Iftheselectedupdateincludesanapplicationthatisnotdescribedintheseinstructions(orthathasbeenupdatedinthemeantime)youcandownloadthecorrespondinginstructionsinAdobeAcrobat®PDFformat.YouwillneedAdobeAcrobatReader®,whichisalreadyinstalledonmanycomputers,toopenPDFdocuments(e.g.fromwww.adobe.com).
ThefollowingSectionsofferdetailedinformationonobtainingsoftwareupdatesfromtheinternetanddownloadingsoftwareintothebalance.
15.2 RequirementsTheminimumrequirementsforobtainingapplicationsfromtheinternetanddownloadingthemintoyourbalanceareasfollows:
– PCwithMicrosoftWindows®operatingsystem(Version98,98SE,ME,NT4.0,2000orXP)
– Internetconnectionandwebbrowser
– PC–balanceconnectioncable(RS232cable,9-pinsub-Dplugm/f,ordernumber11101051)
15.3 Loading software updates from the internetThefirststepistodownloadthesoftwarefromtheinternetontoyourcomputer:
Connecttotheinternet.
Inyourbrowser,select“www.mt.com/balance-support”astheinternetaddress,andthenclickthe“Software”link.
Clickontheappropriateupdatepackageforyourbalance.
Entertheinformationrequiredforregistration.
Loadthesoftwarepackageontoyourcomputer.
Beforeyouinstallthe“e-LoaderII”softwareprogram,pleasereadSection15.4.
Softwareupdates
128
15.4 Loading the new software into the balance/weighing platform
Beforeyoucanloadthesoftwareobtainedfromtheinternetintothebalance,youmustconnectthebalancethroughtheRS232cabletotheserialinterfaceofyourcomputer.Note:ThecablemustalwaysbeconnectedtotheRS232C interface that is permanently fitted at the factory!
Settheinterfaceonthebalancetothefollowingvalues(detailedinformationonthesesystemsettingscanbefoundinSection6.6).Select“Host”astheperipheraldevice,andthensetthefollowingcommunicationparameters:baud rate: 9600, parity: 8 bits/none, handshake: none, end of line: <CR><LF>, character set: ANSI/WIN.
Makesurethatthecorrespondingcommunicationparametersonyourcomputeraresettothesamevalues.
Startthe“e-LoaderIIVXXX”installationprogramthatyouobtainfromtheinternet(“XXX”isaplaceholderfortheversionnumber).Thisprograminstallsthee-Loaderonyourcomputer.
Followtheinstructions,whichwilltakeyoustep-by-stepthroughtheinstallation.
Thee-LoaderIIwillstartautomaticallyafterinstallation.Thisdiagramillustratesthestartingscreenforthee-LoaderII.
Youareaskedtoselect the interface on the computer towhich thebalance iscon-nected(ifnecessary,thissettingcanbechangedatanylatertimeinthe“Options”–>“COMPort”menu).
Havingselectedtheinterface,click“Proceed”.Amessagewindowappears,remindingyouthatthestandardRS232Cinterfaceonthebalanceistobeused.Theinterfacesettingsarealsolistedonceagain(seeabove).Closethewindowbyclickingon“OK”.
Underthefactorysettings,thee-LoaderIIguidesyouthroughtheupdatingprocessusingEnglishasthelanguage.Ifyouwish,youcanenterthe“Options”–>“Language”menutoselectoneoftheotheravailablelanguages.Thee-LoaderIIwillthendisplayalltheinstructionsandnotesinthelanguagethatyouhavechosen.ThefollowingdiagramsandinformationarebasedontheEnglishversion.
Beforeyouupdatethesoftwareofyourbalance,pleasecheckinthe“Help”menuthatthecommunicationwiththebalanceisfunctioning.(Intheexampleshownhere,thee-LoaderIIisconfirmingthatabalanceisconnected.)
Ifthee-LoaderIIreportsthatabalanceisnotconnected,firstcheckwhetherthecorrectinterface,withtherightsetting,hasbeenselected,andthen,ifnecessary,checkthatthecommunicationsettingsofthecomputerandthebalancecorrespond.
Softwareupdates
129
Youcanbegintheupdatingprocessonceyouhavemadethenecessarysettingsandcheckedthattheconnectionisoperating.Clickon“StartSoftwareUpdateProcedure”todothis.Followtheinstructionsprovidedbye-LoaderII;thesewillguideyoustep-by-stepthroughtheupdatingprocess.e-LoaderIIwillaskyouwhetheryouwanttosavethecurrentbalancesettingsonyourcomputer.Werecommendthatyoucarryoutthisdatabackup.Thiswillsaveyoufromhavingtoenterallthesettingsagain,sincetheywillallbereturnedtothefactorysettingsinthecourseoftheupdate.Attheendoftheupdatingprocedure,e-LoaderIIwillaskwhetherthesaveddatashouldbereloadedbackintothebalance.
Beforeyoustarttheactualupdatingoperation,youhavethepossibilitytodefineaSecure IDtoprotectthebalanceagainstunauthorizedsoftwareupdatingoperations.Todothis,clickonthe“CreateSecure-ID”button.Ifyoudonotwishtousethisfunction,clickon“Continue”.
TheSecureIDisbalance-specificandsavedinthebalance.PleasemakeanoteoftheSecureIDandkeepitinasafeplace.IfyouforgettheSecureID,nofurtherupdatescanbemadetothebalance.
Definethe“SecureID”andconfirmitbyenteringitagaininthefieldprovided.Thenclickon“Continue”.
Thebalancenowdisplaysalistoftheupdateswhichhavebeenperformed.Inthiswindowyoucanenterauseridentification“User ID”sothatitissubsequentlypossibletotracewhoperformedthesoftwareupdatingoperation.
Clickon“Continue”tostarttheupdatingoperation.
Thebalancesoftwareconsistsofaterminalsoftwareandaweighing-platformsoftware.Aftertheterminalsoftwarehasbeenloaded,updatingoftheweighing-platformsoftwarebegins.Here,too,youcandefineaSecureIDandenteraUserID.
Changing the Secure ID:TheSecureIDcanbechangedwhenanewsoftwareupdatingoperationisstarted.Todoso,clickonthe“ChangeSecureID”field.YoucannowenteranewSecureID.Ifyouleavethefieldempty,theSecureIDisdeletedandnolongeractive.
Whentheupdatingprocesshasbeencompleted,youcanclosee-LoaderII.Yourbalancewillnowoperatewiththenewlyloadedsoftware.
Softwareupdates
130
15.5 Saving and reloading balance settingsAswellasbalancesoftwareupdates,e-LoaderIIalsooffersadatabackupfunctionwherebythecurrentbalancesettingscanbecopiedtoaPC.Thismeansthatyouhaveabackupcopyofyoursettingsavailableatalltimes.Ifnecessary,youcancopythisbackintothebalance.Thefunctioncanalsobeusedtocopythesettingsfromonebalancetoanother.
InordertosavethecurrentbalancesettingsonaPC,starte-LoaderIIandcallupthedatabackupfunction,asshowninthediagramhere.
Thedialogboxoppositepromptsyoutoselectthepathforsavingthebackupfilethroughthe“Browse” button. e-Loader II suggests a combination of the current date and thecurrenttimeasanameforthebackupfile,andthefileextension“.dat”.(Forexample:“2003_08_19_12_06.dat”forbackupfilethatwascreatedonthe12thAugust2003at12.06.)Youarefreetoalterthefilename,ifyouwish,butnotthe“.dat”extension.
Clickon“Start”tobeginthedatabackup.Successfulcompletionofthebackupiscon-firmedonthedisplay.
TocopythebalancesettingsfromthePCbackintothebalance,callthereloadfunction,asillustratedhere.
Havingstartedthereloadfunctionyoucanselect,viathe“Browse”button,thesettingsfilethatistobeloadedbackintothebalance,afterwhichyoucanbeginthetransferprocesswith“Start”.Bear in mind that this will cause all the settings saved in the balance to be overwritten!
Errorandstatusmessages
131
16 Error and status messages
16.1 Error messages occurring during normal operationMosterrormessagesappearinplaintextdirectlyintherespectiveapplication,andusuallyaccompaniedbyatextdescribinghowtocorrecttheerror.Errormessagesofthistypeareself-explanatoryandthereforenotmentionedbelow.
Thefollowingerrormessagescanappearinsteadoftheweighingresult:
Overload
Theweightonthepanexceedstheweighingcapacityofthebalance.Reducetheweightontheweighingpan.
Underload
Ensurethattheweighingpaniscorrectlyinplace,canmovefreely,anddoesnotcatchonthedraftcover.
Error when switching on or zeroing G(weightdisplayflashes)
Whenthebalancewasswitchedon(i.e.when itwasconnected to thepowersupply,switchedonfromstandbymodeorbyzeroadjustment)oneormorelimitswereexceeded.Theusualreasonforthismessagetoappeariswhenthereisaweightontheweighingpanwhenthebalanceisswitchedon.Removetheweight.
Taring or zeroing was interrupted
Ataringorzeroingoperationwasabortedbecauseastableresultwasnotobtaineddur-ingthesettlingtime.Closethedoorsofthedraftshieldandchecktheworkinglocation(drafts,vibrations).Press“OK”andrepeatthetaring/zeroing.
16.2 Further error messagesIfanyerrormessagesappear(“Errorx”)otherthanthosedescribedabove,pleasecontactyourMETTLERTOLEDOdealer.
Errorandstatusmessages
132
16.3 Status messagesStatusmessagesaredisplayedbymeansofsmallicons(symbols)inthetoprightofthedisplay(closetothedateortime,seeSec-tion5.2).Thestatusiconsindicatethefollowing:
ThebalancewouldliketocarryoutafullyautomaticFACT adjustmentbutisunablebecauseanotheroperatingsequenceisrunning.Theadjustmentiscarriedoutassoonasthebalanceisunloaded,thedisplaybecomesstableandnokeyhasbeenpressedfor2minutes(Section7.4.1).Thestatusicondisappearsaftertheadjust-mentissuccessfullycompleted.Thisstatusiconappearsifthe“CalInfo”functionisactive(Section6.3.1)andanadjustmentisrequired.Inthiscase,theadjustmentmustbestartedmanuallywiththeinternalorexternaladjustmentweight(Sections7.4.2and7.4.3).Aftersuccessfulcompletionoftheadjustment,thestatusicondisappears.
The batteryinyourbalancemustbereplaced.Thisbatteryensuresthatthedateandtimearenotlostwhenthebalanceisdisconnectedfromthenetwork.Contactyourdealer’sservicedepartmentassoonaspossibletohaveaservicetechnicianchangethebattery.
Yourbalanceisdueforservicing.Contactyourdealer’scustomerservicedepartmentassoonaspossibletohaveatechnicianserviceyourbalance.
ReinigungundService
133
17 Cleaning and serviceEverynowandthen,cleantheweighingpan,draftshieldelement,draftshield(dependingonthemodel),housingofyourbalance/weighingplatformusingadampcloth.
Yourbalance/weighingplatformismadefromhigh-quality,durablematerialsandcanthereforebecleanedwithastandard,mildcleaningagent.
Please observe the following notes
– Balances located in the hazardous area must be damp-cleaned topreventtheriskofsparkformationthroughdryrubbingonplasticparts.
– Neverusecleaningagentsthatcontainsolventsorabrasiveingredients.
– Makesurethatnoliquidpenetratesthebalance/weighingplatform.
– Neveropenthebalance/weighingplatformorACadapter.Theydonotcontainanypartsthatcanbecleaned,repairedorreplacedbytheuser.
Note:Thisalsoappliestothebuilt-inclockbatteryinthebalance/weighingplatform.
PleasecontactyourMETTLERTOLEDOdealerfordetailsoftheavailableserviceoptions.Regularservicingbyanauthorizedserviceengineerensuresconstantaccuracyforyearstocomeandprolongstheservicelifeofyourbalance/weighingplatform.
ReinigungundService
134
A
BB
17.1 Cleaning the draft shieldRemovethefollowingparts:
– Weighingpan,draft-shieldelement
– Liftthedraftshieldoffthebalanceandplaceitonacleansurface.
– Removethebottomplate.
– Pushalltheglassesbackasfarastheywillgo.
– Turnthecover(A)tothefront.
– Pull the top glass toward the back andoff.
– Pullthesideglassestowardthebackandoff.
Note: Alwaysholdthe2parallelguidedglasses(sideglassesand top glasses) together with one hand (illustrationsbelow).
– Cleanallpartsthenreassemblethedraftshieldinthereverseorder.
Insert glasses:
Note: Alwaysholdthe2parallelguided glasses (side glassesandtopglasses) together and parallel with one hand(illustra-tions below). The side glassesmustnotbeplacedoustsidetheprojections(B).
Technicaldataandaccessories
135
18 Technical data and accessoriesInthisSectionyouwillfindthemostimportanttechnicaldataforyourbalance.AccessoriesfromtheMETTLERTOLEDOrangeincreasethefunctionalityofyourbalanceandopenupadditionalareasofapplication.InthisSectionyouwillfindalistoftheoptionscurrentlyavailable.
18.1 General dataTechnical data AC adapter PSX2,11132730(external) Dimensions:......................... 235x80x60mm Holedistance:...................... 214x62mm(centermountingholes) Weight:................................ 1.42kg Linevoltage:......................... 230V±10%,0.1A,50/60Hz/115V(±10%),0.2A,50/60Hz(country-specific) Fuses:.................................. Primary:T125L250V(230VVersion)/T250L250V(115VVersion) Secondary:T500L250V Electricaldata:..................... U0≤13.5V,I0≤1.2A,P0≤6W C0≤213nF,L0≤10µH,rectangularcharacteristics Teststandards:..................... IECEN61010-1,IECEN60950-1,CAN/CSA-C22.2No.61010-1,ULStdNo.61010A-1, EN61326+A1+A2+A3(ClassB+Industrialenvironments),FCCPart15(ClassA),
AS/NZSCISPR22,AS/NZS61000.4.3 ATEX:EN60079-15,IEC60079-15
Classification....................... II3GEExnA[nL]IICT5 Applicationrange:................ •Foruseonlyinclosedinteriorrooms •Exhazardousaerea,Zone2 Overvoltagecategoriy:.......... ClassII Degreeofpollution:.............. 2 Degreeofprotectionhousing:.. IP65 Highabovemeansealevel:... Upto4000m Ambienttemperature:........... -10to+40°C
Relativeairhumidity:............ Max.80%at31°C,linearlydecreasingto50%bei40°C,noncondensingHousingmaterials:............... Die-castaluminium,laquered
Technical data balance / weighing platform:• Protection and standards: Overvoltagecategoriy:.......... ClassII Degreeofpollution:.............. 2 Electricaldata:..................... Ui≤13.5V,Ii≤1.2A,Pi≤6W,Ci=0nF,Li=0µH Teststandards:..................... IECEN61010-1,CAN/CSA-C22.2No.61010-1,ULStdNo.61010A-1, EN61326+A1+A2+A3(ClassB+Industrialenvironments),FCCPart15(ClassA),
AS/NZS4251.1,AS/NZS610004252.1 ATEX:EN60079-15,IEC60079-15
Classification:....................... II3GEExnLIICT5 Degreeofprotection:.............. IP44 Verwendungsbereich:........... •Foruseonlyinclosedandcleaninteriorrooms •Exhazardousaerea,Zone2• Environmental conditions Highabovemeansealevel:... Upto4000m Ambienttemperature:........... +5to+40°C Relativeairhumidity:............ Max.80%at31°C,linearlydecreasingto50%bei40°C,noncondensing• Materials Platformhousing:................ Die-castaluminium,laquered,plasticandchromesteel Terminalhousing:................ Die-castzinc,chromedandplastics Weighingpan:..................... Chrome-nickelsteel(S+Mplatform:X2CrNiMo-17-12-2,Lplatform:X5CrNi18-10) Draftshield:......................... Aluminium,plastic,chromesteelandglas Draftshieldelement:............ Die-castzinc,chromed(10mgmodels,S-platform) ChromesteelX2CrNiMo17132(0.1mgmodels)
Technicaldataandaccessories
136
18.2 Model-specific data of the Excellence XS-Ex2 precision balances
18.2.1 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 0.1 mg / 1 mg, S platform with draft shield
Technical data (limit values)Model XS204SX XS603SX XS1003SX XS5003SXDR
Maximumload 210g 610g 1010g 5100g
Maximumload,finerange – – – 1000g
Readability 0.1mg 1mg 1mg 10mg
Readability,finerange – – – 1mg
Taringrange 0…210g 0…610g 0…1010g 0…5100g
Repeatability(sd) 0.2mg 0.9mg 0.8mg 6mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange – – – 1mg
Linearity 0.2mg 2mg 2mg 6mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 0.3mg(100g) 3mg(200g) 3mg(500g) 10mg(2kg)
Sensitivityoffset 5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 5x10-6∙Rnt 4x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 1.5x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 2x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 2x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 2.5x10-6/a∙Rnt 1x10-5/a∙Rnt 1x10-5/a∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Settlingtime 2s 1.2s 1.5s 2s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1 1
Balancedimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 214x366x363 214x366x363 214x366x363 214x366x363
Usableheighofdraftshield[mm] 248 248 248 248
Weighingpandimensions[mm] Ø90 127x127 127x127 127x127
Weight[kg] 8.1 8.1 8.1 8.1
Typical dataModel XS204SX XS603SX XS1003SX XS5003SXDR
Repeatability(sd)typical 0.12mg+1.5x10-7∙Rgr0.5mg+5x10-7∙Rgr 0.4mg+2x10-7∙Rgr 4mg+2x10-7∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(6x10-12g∙Rnt) √(2x10-10g∙Rnt) √(1.2x10-10g∙Rnt) √(5x10-11g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 4x10-7∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 6x10-7∙Rnt 1.5x10-7∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 1x10-6∙Rnt 2.5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 1x10-6∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 360mg+4.5x10-4∙Rgr1.5g+1.5x10-3∙Rgr 1.2g+6x10-4∙Rgr 12g+6x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – – – 1.8g+6x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 24mg+3x10-5∙Rgr 100mg+1x10-4∙Rgr 80mg+4x10-5∙Rgr 800mg+4x10-5∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – – – 120mg+4x10-5∙Rgr
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
137
18.2.2 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 10 mg / 0.1 g, S platform
Technical data (limit values)Model XS4002SX XS6002SX XS4001SX
Maximumload 4100g 6100g 4100g
Maximumload,finerange – – –
Readability 10mg 10mg 100mg
Readability,finerange – – –
Taringrange 0…4100g 0…6100g 0…4100g
Repeatability(sd) 8mg 8mg 80mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange – – –
Linearity 20mg 20mg 60mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 30mg(2kg) 30mg(2kg) 200mg(2kg)
Sensitivityoffset 1.5x10-5∙Rnt 1x10-5∙Rnt 6x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 1.5x10-5/a∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 1.2s 1.2s 0.8s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1
Balancedimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 194x366x96 194x366x96 194x366x96
Draftshield Draftshieldelement Draftshieldelement –
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 170x205 170x205 190x223
Weight[kg] 6.9 6.9 6.4
Typical dataModel XS4002SX XS6002SX XS4001SX
Repeatability(sd)typical 4mg+5x10-7∙Rgr 4mg+3x10-7∙Rgr 40mg+5x10-6∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(3x10-9g∙Rnt) √(2x10-9g∙Rnt) √(2.5x10-8g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 8x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 4x10-6∙Rnt 2.5x10-6∙Rnt 2x10-5∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 12g+1.5x10-3∙Rgr 12g+9x10-3∙Rgr 120g+1.5x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 800mg+1x10-4∙Rgr 800mg+6x10-5∙Rgr 8g+1x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
138
18.2.3 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 10 mg / 0.1 g, M platform
Technical data (limit values)Model XS6002MXDR XS6001MX XS12001MX
Maximumload 6100g 6100g 12100g
Maximumload,finerange 1200g – –
Readability 100mg 100mg 100mg
Readability,finerange 10mg – –
Taringrange 0…6100g 0…6100g 0…12100g
Repeatability(sd) 60mg 80mg 80mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange 10mg – –
Linearity 60mg 60mg 100mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 100mg(5kg) 200mg(2kg) 200mg(5kg)
Sensitivityoffset 2.5x10-5∙Rnt 4x10-5∙Rnt 5x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 1.5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 1.5s 1s 1.2s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1
Balancedimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 240x393x110 240x393x110 240x393x110
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 237x237 237x237 237x237
Weight[kg] 8 8 8
Typical dataModel XS6002MXDR XS6001MX XS12001MX
Repeatability(sd)typical 40mg+1.5x10-6∙Rgr 40mg+3x10-6∙Rgr 40mg+1.5x10-6∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(2x10-9g∙Rnt) √(1.5x10-8g∙Rnt) √(2.5x10-8g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 2.5x10-6∙Rnt 8x10-6∙Rnt 3x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-5∙Rnt 1.2x10-5∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 120g+4.5x10-3∙Rgr 120g+9x10-3∙Rgr 120g+4.5x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. 18g+4.5x10-3∙Rgr – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 8g+3x10-4∙Rgr 8g+6x10-4∙Rgr 8g+3x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ 1.2g+3x10-4∙Rgr – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
139
18.2.4 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 0.1 g / 1 g, L platform
Technical data (limit values)Model XS32001LX XS32000LX XS64001LX XS64000LX
Maximumload 32100g 32100g 64100g 64100g
Maximumload,finerange – – – –
Readability 0.1g 1g 0.1g 1g
Readability,finerange – – –
Taringrange 0…32100g 0…32100g 0…64100g 0…64100g
Repeatability(sd) 0.08g 0.6g 0.1g 0.6g
Repeatability(sd),finerange – – – –
Linearity 0.3g 0.6g 0.5g 0.6g
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 0.3g(10kg) 1g(10kg) 0.5g(20kg) 1g(20kg)
Sensitivityoffset 3x10-5∙Rnt 6x10-5∙Rnt 2x10-5∙Rnt 3x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 1x10-5/°C∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/°C∙Rnt 1x10-5/°C∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/°C∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 3x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt 3x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 1.5s 1.2s 1.8s 1.5s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1 1
Balancedimensions(WxDxH)[mm] •Terminalattachedtothelongside 360x404x130 360x404x130 360x404x130 360x404x130•Terminalattachedtotheshortside 280x484x130 280x484x130 280x484x130 280x484x130
Weighingplatformdimensions(BxTxH)[mm] 280x360x130 280x360x130 280x360x130 280x360x130
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 280x360 280x360 280x360 280x360
Weight[kg] 12.4 12.4 14.1 14.1
Typical dataModel X32001LX X32000LX X64001LX X64000LX
Repeatability(sd)typical 40mg+6x10-7∙Rgr 400mg+3x10-6∙Rgr 40mg+6x10-7∙Rgr 400mg+3x10-6∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(3x10-7 g∙Rnt) √(1.2x10-7 g∙Rnt) √(4x10-7g∙Rnt) √(6x10-7g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 1x10-5∙Rnt 3x10-5∙Rnt 8x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 5x10-6∙Rnt 1x10-5∙Rnt 3x10-6∙Rnt 5x10-6∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 120g+1.8x10-3∙Rgr 1200g+9x10-3∙Rgr 120g+1.8x10-3∙Rgr 1200g+9x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – – – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 8g+1.2x10-4∙Rgr 80g+6x10-4∙Rgr 8g+1.2x10-4∙Rgr 80g+6x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – – – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
140
18.3 Model-specific data of the Excellence X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms
18.3.1 X-Ex2 precision weighing platform with readability of 0.1 mg / 1 mg, S platform with draft shield
Technical data (limit values)Model X204SX X603SX X1003SX X5003SXDR
Maximumload 210g 610g 1010g 5100g
Maximumload,finerange – – – 1000g
Readability 0.1mg 1mg 1mg 10mg
Readability,finerange – – – 1mg
Taringrange 0…210g 0…610g 0…1010g 0…5100g
Repeatability(sd) 0.2mg 0.9mg 0.8mg 6mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange – – – 1mg
Linearity 0.2mg 2mg 2mg 6mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 0.3mg(100g) 3mg(200g) 3mg(500g) 10mg(2kg)
Sensitivityoffset 5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 5x10-6∙Rnt 4x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 1.5x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 2x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 2x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 2.5x10-6/a∙Rnt 1x10-5/a∙Rnt 1x10-5/a∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Settlingtime 2s 1.2s 1.5s 2s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1 1
Dimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 214x260x363 194x257x276 194x257x276 194x257x276
Usableheighofdraftshield[mm] 248 248 248 248
Weighingpandimensions[mm] Ø90 127x127 127x127 127x127
Weight[kg] 7 7 7 7
Typical dataModel X204SX X603SX X1003SX X5003SXDR
Repeatability(sd)typical 0.12mg+1.5x10-7∙Rgr0.4mg+2x10-7∙Rgr 0.4mg+2.5x10-7∙Rgr 4mg+2x10-7∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(6x10-12g∙Rnt) √(2x10-10g∙Rnt) √(1.2x10-10g∙Rnt) √(5x10-11g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 4x10-7∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 6x10-7∙Rnt 1.5x10-7∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 1x10-6∙Rnt 2.5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 1x10-6∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 360mg+4.5x10-4∙Rgr1.2g+6x10-4∙Rgr 1.2g+7.5x10-4∙Rgr 12g+6x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – – – 1.8g+6x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 24mg+3x10-5∙Rgr 100mg+1x10-4∙Rgr 80mg+4x10-5∙Rgr 800mg+4x10-5∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – – – 120mg+4x10-5∙Rgr
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
141
18.3.2 X-Ex2 precision weighing platform with readability of 10 mg / 0.1 g, S platform
Technical data (limit values)Model X4002SX X6002SX X4001SX
Maximumload 4100g 6100g 4100g
Maximumload,finerange – – –
Readability 10mg 10mg 100mg
Readability,finerange – – –
Taringrange 0…4100g 0…6100g 0…4100g
Repeatability(sd) 8mg 8mg 80mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange – – –
Linearity 20mg 20mg 60mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 30mg(2kg) 30mg(2kg) 200mg(2kg)
Sensitivityoffset 1.5x10-5∙Rnt 1x10-5∙Rnt 6x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 3x10-6/ºC∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 1.5x10-5/a∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 1.2s 1.2s 0.8s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1 1
Dimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 194x257x96 194x257x96 194x257x96
Draftshield Draftshieldelement Draftshieldelement –
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 170x205 170x205 190x223
Weight[kg] 5.9 5.9 5.4
Typical dataModel X4002SX X6002S X4001SX
Repeatability(sd)typical 4mg+5x10-7∙Rgr 4mg+3x10-7∙Rgr 40mg+5x10-6∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(3x10-9g∙Rnt) √(2x10-9g∙Rnt) √(2.5x10-8g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 1.5x10-6∙Rnt 8x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 4x10-6∙Rnt 2.5x10-6∙Rnt 2x10-5∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 12g+1.5x10-3∙Rgr 12g+9x10-3∙Rgr 120g+1.5x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 800mg+1x10-4∙Rgr 800mg+6x10-5∙Rgr 8g+1x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
142
18.3.3 X-Ex2 precision weighing platform with readability of 0.1 g, M platform
Technical data (limit values)Model X6001MX X12001MX
Maximumload 6100g 12100g
Maximumload,finerange – –
Readability 100mg 100mg
Readability,finerange – –
Taringrange 0…6100g 0…12100g
Repeatability(sd) 80mg 80mg
Repeatability(sd),finerange – –
Linearity 60mg 100mg
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 200mg(2kg) 200mg(5kg)
Sensitivityoffset 4x10-5∙Rnt 5x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt 1.5x10-5/ºC∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 5x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 0.8s 1.2s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1
Dimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 240x278x110 240x278x110
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 237x237 237x237
Weight[kg] 6.9 6.9
Typical dataModel X6001MX X12001MX
Repeatability(sd)typical 40mg+3x10-6∙Rgr 40mg+1.5x10-6∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(1.5x10-8g∙Rnt) √(2.5x10-8g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 8x10-6∙Rnt 3x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 1.2x10-5∙Rnt 1.2x10-5∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 120g+9x10-3∙Rgr 120g+4.5x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 8g+6x10-4∙Rgr 8g+3x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
143
18.3.4 X-Ex2 precision weighing platform with readability of 0.1 g, L platform
Technical data (limit values)Model X32001LX X64001LX
Maximumload 32100g 64100g
Maximumload,finerange – –
Readability 0.1g 0.1g
Readability,finerange – –
Taringrange 0…32100g 0…64100g
Repeatability(sd) 0.08g 0.1g
Repeatability(sd),finerange – –
Linearity 0.3g 0.5g
Eccentricloaddeviation(measuredat) 0.3g(10kg) 0.5g(20kg)
Sensitivityoffset 3x10-5∙Rnt 2x10-5∙Rnt
Sensitivitytemperaturedrift1) 1x10-5/°C∙Rnt 1x10-5/°C∙Rnt
Sensitivitystability2) 3x10-5/a∙Rnt 5x10-5/a∙Rnt
Settlingtime 1.5s 1.8s
Interfaceupdaterate 23/s 23/s
nternaladjustmentweigths3) 1 1
Dimensions(WxDxH)[mm] 280x360x130 280x360x130
Weighingpandimensions[mm] 280x360 280x360
Weight[kg] 10.7 12.1
Typical dataModel X32001LX X64001LX
Repeatability(sd)typical 40mg+6x10-7∙Rgr 40mg+6x10-7∙Rgr
Differentialnonlinearity(sd)typical √(3x10-7 g∙Rnt) √(4x10-7g∙Rnt)
Differentialeccentricloaddeviation(sd)typical 1x10-5∙Rnt 8x10-6∙Rnt
Sensitivityoffset(sd)typical 5x10-6∙Rnt 3x10-6∙Rnt
Minimumweight4)(accordingtoUSP),typical 120g+1.8x10-3∙Rgr 120g+1.8x10-3∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(acc.toUSP)finerange,typ. – –
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)typical 8g+1.2x10-4∙Rgr 8g+1.2x10-4∙Rgr
Minimumweight4)(1%,2sd)finerange,typ – –
Rgr = GrossweightRnt = Netweight(sampleweight)sd = Standarddeviationa = Year(annum)1) Inthetemperaturerange10…30°C2) Sensitivitydrift/yearafterputtingintooperationforthefirsttime,withtheFACTself-calibrationfunctionactivated3) TheadjustmentweightsoftheXSprecisionbalancesaremadefromstainlessantimagneticchrome-nickelsteel.
ThemassesoftheadjustmentweightsaretraceabletotheprototypekilogramwhichisthestandardunitofmasskeptinParis.4) Theminimumweightcanbeimprovedbythefollowingmeasures:
– Selectingsuitableweighingparameters – Choosingabetterlocation – Usingsmallertaringcontainers
Technicaldataandaccessories
144
18.4 Dimensions of the Excellence XS-Ex2 precision balances
18.4.1 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 0.1 mg, S platform with draft shield
178
156
199
214
172.
5
257
95
251
177
156
72
197128
366
58
77
95
248
356 36
3
3
115
Ø 90
Models:XS204SX
Technicaldataandaccessories
145
178
127
127
156
199
214
172.
5
257
95
251
177
156
72
197128
366
58
77
95
248
356 36
3
3
115
Models: XS603SXXS1003SXXS5003SXDR
18.4.2 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 1 mg, S platform with draft shield
Technicaldataandaccessories
146
18.4.3 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 10 mg, S platform with draftshield element
Models: XS4002SXXS6002SX
170
156
194
257
226
72
22197128
115
366
178
263
168
58
77 88 96
205
251
25
Technicaldataandaccessories
147
18.4.4 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 0.1 g, S platform
Models: XS4001SX
190
156
194
226
72
22197128
115
366
178
263
168
58
77
96
223
257
251
25
Technicaldataandaccessories
148
18.4.5 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 10 mg / 0.1 g, M platform
Models: XS6001MXXS6002MXDRXS12001MX
214
77.8
178
58
77
110
202
240
278
393
237
206.5135 3423
7
115
309
32
Technicaldataandaccessories
149
280124
404
296
194 15
360
68
130
46
216156
124
77
174
18.4.6 XS-Ex2 precision balances with readability of 0.1 g / 1 g, L platform
Models: XS32001LXXS64001LXXS32000LXXS64000LX
Technicaldataandaccessories
150
156
199
214
172.
5
257 3
95
251
177
156
Ø 90
72
197
5895
248
356 36
3
Models:X204SX
18.5 Dimensions of the Excellence X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms
18.5.1 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 0.1 mg, S platform with draft shield
Technicaldataandaccessories
151
18.5.2 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 1 mg, S platform with draft shield
127
127
156
199
214
172.
5
257 3
95
251
177
156
72
197
5895
248
356 36
3
Models:X603SXX1003SXX5003SXDR
Technicaldataandaccessories
152
170
156
194
257
226
72
22197
263
168
58
88 96
205
25
Models:X4002SXX6002SX
18.5.3 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 10 mg, S platform with draft shield ele-ment
Technicaldataandaccessories
153
190
156
194
257
226
72
22197
263
168
58
96
223
25
Models:X4001SX
18.5.4 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 0.1 g, S platform
Technicaldataandaccessories
154
Models:X6001MXX12001MX
214
77.8
58
110
202
240
309
278
237 x 237
206.5 34
32
18.5.5 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 0.1 g, M platform
Technicaldataandaccessories
155
Models:X32001LXX64001LX
280
29615
360
68
130
46
216
18.5.6 X-Ex2 precision weighing platforms with readability of 0.1 g, L platform
Technicaldataandaccessories
156
18.6 AccessoriesYoucanincreasethefunctionalityofyourbalancewithaccessoriesfromtheMETTLERTOLEDOrange.Thefollowingoptionsareavail-able:
Printer (Itisnot permitted to use theseunits in Ex hazadous areas !)
RS-P42:PrinterwithconnectioncableRS232,forrecordingresults 00229265
BT-P42:Bluetoothprinterwithwirelessconnectiontothebalance 11132540
Optional interfaces(secondinterfaces)
RS232C(secondRS232Cinterface) 11132500
BT(Bluetooth):Forwirelessconnectiontomax.7peripheralinstruments(XS-Ex2modelsonly) 11132530
BTS(Bluetooth):Forwirelessconnectionto1peripheralinstrument 11132535
Ethernet:ForconnectiontoanEthernetnetwork 11132515
Zweitanzeige (Itisnot permitted to use theseunits in Ex hazadous areas !)(displaysonlytheweightvalueandunit,ifdefined)
RS/LC-BLD:AuxiliarydisplaywithRS232&LCconnectionandexternalpowersupply,withtablestand 00224200
RS/LC-BLDS:AuxiliarydisplaywithRS232&LCconnectionfortablestandorbalancestand 11132630
BT-BLDbluetoothauxiliarydisplayforwirelessconnectiontobalancewithBTSinterface,withtablestand 11132555
Input/output devices
ErgoSens:programmablesensorforhands-offoperation,cablelength=0.6m 11132601
Density determination kit
For1mgmodels:Kitfordensitydeterminationofsolidsandliquids 11132680
Sinker10ml:fordensitydeterminationofliquids 00210260
Sinker10ml,certifiedmodel 00210672
Precisionthermometer,certifiedmodel 11132685
Weighing pans
Weighingpan(supportincluded),190mmx223mm 11132655
Weighingpan(supportanddraftshieldelementincluded),170mmx205mm 11132660
MPS(MagneticProtectionShield)weighingpanfor0.1gmodels,190mmx223mm 11132625
MPS(MagneticProtectionShield)weighingpanfor10mgmodels,170mmx205mm 11132626
Draft shield
Draftshield“MagicCube”,usableheigh175mm(0.1mgand1mgmodels) 11131650
Simpledraftshield,usableheigh175mm(10mgand0.1g*) 11131653*Forthe0.1gmodeltheweighingpanset“11132660”mustbeorderedadditionally.
Draftshieldtocovertheentirebalance,(WxDxH)300x450x450mm 11134430
Draftshieldtocovertheentirebalance,(WxDxH)550x470x580mm 11134470
Technicaldataandaccessories
157
Protective covers
ProtectivecoverforXS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithSplatform,10mgand0.1gmodels 11132571
ProtectivecoverforXS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithMplatform,0.1gand1gmodels 11132572
ProtectivecoverforX-Ex2weighingplatforms,10mgund0.1gmodels(onlyforSplatform) 11133034
ProtectivecoverforX-Ex2weighingplatforms,(onlyforMplatform) 11132574
ProtectivecoverforXS-Ex2terminal(onlywithS+Mplatform) 11106870
ProtectivecoverforXS-Ex2terminal(onlywithLplatform) 11132573
Software
LabXprobalance 11120301
LabXlightbalance 11120317
LabXdirectbalance 11120340
Various
Anti-theftdevice(steelcable) 11600361
Hookforthehanger(onlyforLplatform) 11132565
Standforterminal,terminalhightoverweighingpan=0.3m(SandMplatform) 11132636
Standforterminal,terminalhightoverweighingpan=0.3m(Lplatform) 11132653
TransportcaseforXS-Ex2precisionbalanceswithSplatform,10mgund0.1gmodels 11132595
ProductioncertificatePRO 11106895
ValidationHandbookI 11120332
ValidationHandbookII 11120333
Appendix
158
19 Appendix
19.1 Conversion table for weight units
Kilogram 1kg = 1000.0 g 1g = 0.001 kg
Milligram 1mg = 0.001 g 1g = 1000.0 mg
Microgram 1µg = 0.000001 g 1g = 1000000.0 µg
Carat 1ct = 0.2 g 1g = 5.0 ct
Pound 1lb = 453.59237 g 1g ≈ 0.00220462262184878 lb
Ounce(avdp) 1oz = 28.349523125 g 1g ≈ 0.0352739619495804 oz
Ounce(troy) 1ozt = 31.1034768 g 1g ≈ 0.0321507465686280 ozt
Grain 1GN = 0.06479891 g 1g ≈ 15.4323583529414 GN
Pennyweight 1dwt = 1.55517384 g 1g ≈ 0.643014931372560 dwt
Momme 1mom = 3.75 g 1g ≈ 0.266666666666667 mom
Mesghal 1msg ≈ 4.6083 g 1g ≈ 0.217 msg
TaelHongKong 1tlh = 37.429 g 1g ≈ 0.0267172513291833 tlh
TaelSingapore(Malaysia)
1tls ≈ 37.7993641666667 g 1g ≈ 0.0264554714621853 tls
TaelTaiwan 1tlt = 37.5 g 1g ≈ 0.0266666666666667 tlt
Tola 1tola = 11.6638038 g 1g ≈ 0.0857353241830079 tola
Baht 1baht = 15.16 g 1g ≈ 0.0659630606860158 baht
Appendix
159
19.2 SOPs - standard operating procedures
InthedocumentationofaGLPtest,theSOPsareasmall,butveryimportantpart.
PracticalexperienceconfirmsthatSOPswrittenin-housearefollowedmuchbetterthanSOPswrittenbyananexternal,anonymoussource.
YouwillfindbelowabriefoverviewoftheresponsibilitiesinrelationtoSOPs,aswellasachecklistforcreatinganSOP.
Responsibilities in relation to SOPs
Headoftestinglaboratory InstructsSOPstobecreated
ApprovesSOPswithdateandsignature
Testingsupervisor EnsuresthatSOPsareavailable
ApprovesSOPsasdeputytolaboratoryhead
Employees FollowtheSOPsandotherguidelines
GLPqualityassurance CheckswhethervalidSOPsareavailable
CheckswhethertheSOPsarefollowed
Checkshowandwhenchangesaredocumente
Checklist for creating SOPs
Administrative matters YES NO
1. UseofSOPforms
2. Nameoftestinglaboratory
3. DateofcreationofSOP
4. ArchivereferenceforSOPs
5. Pagenumber(1ofn)
6. Title
7. Dateofrelease
8. Modificationnumber
9. Designationofdepartments/officesresponsibleforimplementation
10. Dateandsignaturesn:
a)Author
b)Personchecking
c)Personauthorizedtoapprove
11. Distributionlist
Appendix
160
Contents of the SOP YES NO
1. Introductionandobjective
2. Materialrequired
3. Descriptionofworksteps
4. Descriptionofdocumentation
5. Dataprocessingandevaluation
6. Documents,samples,etc.,tobepreserved
7. Archivinginformation
Appendix
161
19.3 Certificate of the issuing institution
19.3.1 Power supply PSX2
Appendix
162
Appendix
163
Appendix
164
19.3.2 Balances XS-Ex2 and Platforms X-Ex2
Appendix
165
Appendix
166
Index
167
20 IndexAACadapter 20Accessories 135, 156Accessrights 47Additivemode 73Adjustment 38Adjustment(calibration) 65Adjustmentwiththeinternalweight 75, 76Ambientconditions 42Application-specificsettings 33Application“Density” 85Application“DynamicWeighing” 114Application“Formulation” 78Application“LabXClient” 126Application“PercentWeighing” 99Application“PieceCounting” 104Application“Statistics” 69Application“Weighing” 51Applications 33Automaticzerosetting 42AutoZero 42Auxiliaryliquid 86, 91
BBackupcopy 130Balanceinformation 49Balanceparameters 41Barcodedata 61Battery 132Beep 117Bluetooth 25Brightnessofthedisplay 45
CCalibration 38Cautionarynotes 12Certificate 39Certificateoftheissuinginstitution 161Certifiedversionsofbalances 33, 43, 55Checkingtheadjustment 67Cleaning 133Cleaningagents 133Connectionofperipheraldevices 23Continuousmode 44Contrast 45Controls 31Conversiontableforweightunits 158
DDatabackup 129, 130Date 32, 46Densityapplication 85Densitystatistics 95Densitytable 98DimensionsoftheX-Ex2weighingplatforms 150DimensionsoftheXS-Ex2precisionbalances 144Dismantling 21Display 32Displaymode 32Disposal 13DynamicWeighing 114
Ee-LoaderII 127Energysavingfunction 48Environmentalconditions 135ErgoSens 48Errorandstatusmessages 131Errormessages 131Externaladjustmentweight 39Externalkeyboard 62Externaltestweight 40
FFACT 38, 65, 132Factorysettings 49Fixedreferencepiececount 105Footer 57Formulationapplication 78Freeweighingunit 55Fullyautomaticadjustment(calibration) 65Functionkeys 33, 53, 70, 79, 87, 100, 105, 115
GGammasphere 93Generaldata 135Gettingtoknowyourbalance 11GLP 159
HHanger 85Header 56
Index
168
IIdentifiers 61, 63Individualvalues 57Infofields 100Informationfields 32, 54, 71, 80, 88, 106, 118InstallingACadapterPSX2 20Installingdraftshield/weighingpan 16Intendeduse 12Interface 43Introducing 11ISO14001 11ISO9001 11Itemcounter 63
KKeyboard 62Keys 30, 31
LLabXbalance 126LabXClient 126LabXlightbalance 126LabXprobalance 126Language 43Levelingthebalance/weighingplatform 19
MMarkingtheBalance/WeighingplatformandtheACAdapt-
er 22Materials 135Meanvalue 77Meanweight 76Minimumweight 116Model-specificdataoftheX-Ex2weighingplatforms 140Model-specificdataoftheXS-Ex2precisionbalances 136MT-SICS 27
OOperatingsequence 35Overload 131
PPassword 36, 47PercentWeighingapplication 99Peripheraldevices 23, 43Piececounting 104Placingtheterminal 17PNT 159powersupplyvoltage 20Printout 58Protectionandstandards 135protectionoftheinstrument 12
RReference 100Referencepiececount 105Referenceweight 102Relativestandarddeviation 77Reloadfunction 130Repeatability 42Resolution 63RS232 23RS232Cinterface 26
SSafetymeasuresduringoperation 13SecureID 129Securitysystem 36Selectingthelocation 19Seriesofweighings 73Service 132, 133Settingupthebalance 14Simpleweighing 30Sinker 85, 92SmartTrac 32Software 31, 33, 127Softwareupdates 127Solidbody 91SOPs-standardoperatingprocedures 159SpecialConditionsX 13SpecificationsoftheRS232Cinterface 26Stabilitydetector 30Standarddeviation 77Standardoperatingprocedures 159Statistics 69, 87, 122, 124Statisticsapplication 69Statusicons 32, 132Statusmessages 131, 132Summertime 46Switchbalanceoff 30Switchbalanceon 30Systemintegration 23Systemsettings 34, 37
TTargetvalue 83Taring 30Technicaldata 135Temperaturecriterion 65Terminal 31Terminalsettings 45Time 32, 46Tolerances 83Touchfunction 45Touchscreen 32
Index
169
UUnderload 131Unpackingandcheckingthestandardequipment 14Unpackingthedraftshield 15Usageofdatainterface“RS232” 23Usageoftheoptionaldatainterface“Bluetooth” 25UserID 129
VValuerelease 42Volume 45
WWeighingapplication 51Weighingresult 32Weighingtype 42Weighingunit 32, 55Weightdisplay 32Weightdisplayflashes 131Wintertime 46
ZZeroadjustment 30Zerosetting 42
To protect your METTLER TOLEDO product’s future:METTLER TOLEDO Service assures the quality, measuring accuracy and preservation of value of all METTLER TOLEDO products for years to come.Please send for full details about our attractive terms of service.Thank you.
Subjecttotechnicalchangesandtochangesintheaccessoriessuppliedwiththeinstruments.
©Mettler-ToledoAG200611780831APrintedinSwitzerland0612/2.12
Mettler-Toledo AG, Laboratory & Weighing Technologies,CH-8606Greifensee,SwitzerlandPhone+41-44-9442211,Fax+41-44-9443060,Internet:http://www.mt.com
*P11780831*